JP2023057900A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing appropriate display according to a situation.SOLUTION: A game machine includes display means 13 for displaying an image, and performance control means 100 for controlling execution of a performance. The performance control means 100 can cause the display means 13 to execute predetermined display when an error is detected in a state that the display means 13 is executing the predetermined display, and the error is corrected, can cause the display means 13 to execute display different from the predetermined display when power shutdown occurs in a state that the display means 13 is executing the predetermined display, and recovery from the power shutdown is made, causes the display means 13 to display a special image notifying that a game is with a second prescribed number when the game with the second prescribed number is started, causes the display means not to display the special image at a predetermined timing when a replay is won in the game with the second prescribed number, and causes the display means not to display the special image at a predetermined timing when a small winning combination is won in the game with the second prescribed number.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

The present invention relates to game machines.

2. Description of the Related Art A slot machine having a plurality of reels having a plurality of patterns arranged on an outer peripheral surface thereof is conventionally known as a gaming machine. In the slot machine, as the reels start rotating with the start of a game, an internal lottery using a lottery table is performed. Further, when the reels are stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination won in the internal lottery is displayed by a plurality of reels, and if this winning combination wins, the processing corresponding to the winning combination may be performed, for example, by medals. A medal payout process for paying out (game value), a replay process for enabling the game to be played again without newly consuming medals, and the like are performed.

In addition, in the game machine, an effect using a liquid crystal display or the like is performed as the game progresses. As such a gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that executes a predetermined effect when power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-72532 A

By the way, gaming machines are required to be able to perform appropriate display according to the situation.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of executing appropriate display according to the situation.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention includes:
a plurality of reels;
stop buttons provided corresponding to the plurality of reels;
an internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery to determine the suitability of a role;
Winning judgment means for judging the winning of a winning combination based on the stop mode of the plurality of reels;
Reel control means for rotating the plurality of reels for each game and controlling the operation of the stop button to stop the reels in a stop mode according to the result of an internal lottery;
an instruction function control means for controlling the execution of an instruction performance for assisting the winning of a predetermined combination;
A gaming machine comprising an effect control means for controlling display of an image on the display means,
In a predetermined game, it is possible to play the game by inserting either the first specified number or the second specified number of game values,
A game performed by inserting the second specified number of game values has lower performance related to the instruction effect than a game performed by inserting the first specified number of game values,
The production control means is
When an error is detected while the display means is displaying a predetermined display and the error is canceled, the display means can be caused to display the predetermined display,
When a power failure occurs while the display means is displaying the predetermined display, and the power failure is restored, the display means can display a display different from the predetermined display,
causing the display means to display a special image notifying that the game is being played with the second specified number when the game with the second specified number is started;
When a replay is won in the second specified number of games, a predetermined period of time relating to the condition for starting the demonstration effect elapses without a predetermined operation being input to the gaming machine after the last operation of pressing the stop button. a state in which the special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing before the
When a small winning combination is won in the second specified number of games, a predetermined period of time relating to the conditions for starting the demonstration effect is made without inputting a predetermined operation to the gaming machine after the last operation of pressing the stop button. The special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing before the time elapses.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, when an error is detected while the display means is displaying a predetermined display and the error is canceled, the predetermined display before the error detection is performed again, so that an error occurs. It is possible to prevent the performance from being skipped. Here, when an error occurs, the player is likely to continue playing the game after the error is canceled, but the player can enjoy the game without overlooking the effect. Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when a power failure occurs while the display means is displaying a predetermined display and the power is restored from the power failure, the predetermined display before the power failure occurs is not performed. Here, the power outage generally occurs after the player has finished playing the game, such as after the amusement arcade is closed, and there is a possibility that the player has changed before the power outage and after the power outage. expensive. According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to erase the display before the occurrence of the power failure, and execute appropriate display for the new player's game.

In addition, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to appropriately control the notification of the information regarding the game with the second specified number. (1) Since the special image is displayed when the game with the second specified number is started, the player sees the display of the special image and performs a two-coin game (a game with low performance related to the instruction effect). You can recognize what is being done. (2) Even if a replay is won in a double-bet game or if a small combination is won, the special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing after the last stop button is pressed. In other words, the special image is not continuously displayed after the third stop operation of the stop button even if the player wins the replay or wins the small winning combination in the double bet game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the other player (the next player) avoids the game due to the special image being continuously displayed after the two-piece game is finished. (3) In addition, even when winning a replay or winning a small winning combination, the same processing is performed in which the special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing, so the processing is simplified. It is possible to improve development efficiency and prevent storage capacity from being compressed.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, appropriate display can be executed according to the situation.

1 is a perspective view showing an example of a game machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating an internal lottery table same. Similarly, it is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the state of the stop operation at the time of winning in each winning area and the winning combination. Similarly, it is a state transition diagram of a game state. Similarly, it is a state transition diagram of a game section and an effect state. Similarly, it is a diagram showing an example of a special image displayed in the two-piece game. It is a figure for demonstrating another example of a special image same. FIG. 4 is an external view for explaining a schematic mechanical configuration of a slot machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 3 is an external view of the slot machine with the front door opened for explaining the schematic mechanical configuration of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of a reel similarly. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a schematic electrical configuration of the slot machine of the same; It is an explanatory view for explaining rotation and stop processing of reels of the same. It is an explanatory view for explaining rotation and stop processing of reels of the same. It is an explanatory view for explaining rotation and stop processing of reels of the same. It is the same and the flowchart which showed the main process of a main-control board. 5 is a flowchart showing reel stop processing of the main control board; It is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the gaming machine. Timing chart of the blocker position, the control state of the main control board (main control means), and the control state of the sub control board (sub control means) related to the settlement process executed based on the operation of the settlement button of the game machine. is. Similarly, it is a flow chart of the control operation on the main control board side related to the settlement processing of the gaming machine. Similarly, it is a flowchart of the control operation on the sub-control board side related to the settlement processing of the gaming machine. Similarly, it is a timing chart (part 1) showing processing before and after the settlement processing of the gaming machine is being performed. FIG. 10 is a timing chart (part 2) showing processes before and after the settlement process of the gaming machine is being performed; FIG. It is a figure showing the kind of error of a gaming machine, an error code, and the cancellation|release method similarly. 3 is a timing chart (part 3) showing processes before and after the settlement process of the gaming machine is being performed; FIG. 4 is a timing chart (part 4) showing processes before and after the settlement process of the gaming machine is being performed; FIG. FIG. 5 is a timing chart (No. 5) showing the processing before and after the settlement processing of the gaming machine is being performed; FIG. Fig. 6 is a timing chart (No. 6) showing processes before and after the settlement process of the gaming machine is being performed; It is a perspective view showing an example of a game machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of a reel similarly. It is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating an internal lottery table same. Similarly, it is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the state of the stop operation at the time of winning in each winning area and the winning combination. Similarly, it is a state transition diagram of a game state. Similarly, it is a state transition diagram of a game section and an effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the passing course of a medal|token equally. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of error and an error code similarly. Similarly, it is a diagram for explaining the display of the display means when an error or power failure occurs during the operation effect.

(First embodiment)
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a case where the present invention is applied to a slot machine, which is one type of gaming machine, will be described as an example. good too.
As shown in FIG. 1, a slot machine (gaming machine) 10 of the present invention includes a box-shaped housing 11 whose front side, which is a surface facing a player, is open, and the front side opening of the housing 11 is opened and closed. It is provided with a front door 12 that opens. The housing 11 accommodates a reel unit in which a rotatable first reel 20a, a second reel 20b and a third reel 20c are unitized, a hopper device for paying out medals (game value), and the like. The front door 12 is divided into an upper door 12a and a lower door 12b.

The upper door 12a is provided with a liquid crystal display (display means) 13, a device for presentation such as a speaker (sound output means) 14, and a display window 16. As shown in FIG. The liquid crystal display 13 displays images (moving images and still images) for various effects. In addition, the speaker 14 outputs sounds for various effects (music, sound effects, voice, etc.). In addition to the liquid crystal display 13 and the speaker 14, the device for presentation may be provided with an illumination device such as a lamp (LED), or a movable accessory operable by an actuator or the like.

Behind the display window 16, a reel unit is arranged so that a part thereof can be visually recognized from outside the display window 16.例文帳に追加A plurality of types of symbols are arranged in a line on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 20a to 20c. pattern) is displayed. The display window 16 is provided with upper, middle, and lower display positions for visually recognizing the symbols on the reels 20a to 20c. It is Also, when the required number (prescribed number) of medals is inserted for one game, the activated line is activated.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the number of medals required for one game (specified number) is set for each game state, which will be described later. One or more are set. Specifically, the prescribed number is set to 2 or 3 according to the game state, and it is possible to execute the game by inserting (betting) 2 or 3 medals. . In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in both cases of playing a game with two medals inserted and playing a game with three medals inserted, the middle stage of the first reel 20a and the , the upper stage of the second reel 20b and the lower stage of the third reel 20c constitute a pay line. Note that different effective lines may be set according to the number of inserted medals.

The outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 20a to 20c is divided into 20 areas (frames) at regular intervals, and one of a plurality of types of symbols is arranged in each frame. Symbol numbers 0 to 19 are associated with each frame (symbols arranged in each frame) of each of the reels 20a to 20c.

In the slot machine 10, the reels 20a to 20c start rotating at the start of the game, and an internal lottery is executed to determine whether one of the winning combinations wins or loses (no win). Next, when the reels 20a to 20c are stopped and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination won in the internal lottery is displayed on the activated line, this winning combination wins, and the processing corresponding to the winning combination (winning process) is executed.

Below the display window 16, a game information display section 17 and an advantageous section display 18 are provided. The game information display unit 17 includes an LED, a lamp, a 7-segment display, and the like, and displays various game information such as the number of medal credits, the number of medals paid out or won in one game, and error information. In addition, the advantageous section indicator 18 has an LED, and by lighting and extinguishing of this LED, it is notified whether or not the player is staying in the advantageous section.

The lower door 12b has a medal insertion slot 22 for inserting medals, a bet button 23 for betting credited medals, a start lever (game start operation means) 24 operated when starting a game, and a rotating There are provided stop buttons (stop operation means) 26a, 26b, 26c for stopping the existing reels, a payout port 27 for paying out medals by a hopper device, and a medal tray 28 for receiving the medals paid out from the payout port 27. . A medal sensor 29 (see FIG. 2) for detecting passage of medals inserted from the medal slot 22 is provided at the back of the medal slot 22 .

In the slot machine 10, the operation of the start lever 24 is validated by inserting medals into the medal slot 22 or by operating the bet button 23 to bet a specified number of medals. Also, when the activated start lever 24 is operated, the game is started. When a game is started, the reels 20a-20c start rotating, and when the rotation speed of each reel 20a-20c reaches a constant speed and becomes steady rotation, operation of the stop buttons 26a-26c is enabled. Further, when the activated stop buttons 26a to 26c are operated, the reels 20a to 20c corresponding to the operated stop buttons 26a to 26c are stopped.

As shown in FIG. 2, inside the slot machine 10, a main control board (main control device) 31 and a sub control board (sub control device) 32 are provided. The main control board 31 receives input signals from input means such as the bet button 23, the start lever 24, the stop buttons 26a to 26c, and the medal sensor 29, and performs various calculations for executing the game. Based on this, it controls output means such as a reel unit and a hopper device. Further, the sub-control board 32 receives a signal sent from the main control board 31, performs various calculations for executing effects, and controls the liquid crystal display 13, speaker 14, etc. for effects based on the calculation results. Control the device.

The main control board 31 and the sub-control board 32 are electrically connected, and various information (signals) such as information indicating the game state can be transmitted from the main control board 31 to the sub-control board 32. However, information cannot be transmitted from the sub-control board 32 to the main control board 31 .
The functions of each board such as the main control board 31 and the sub-control board 32 are preliminarily stored in hardware such as various processors (CPU, DSP, etc.), ICs, information storage media such as ROMs and RAMs, and ROMs. It is realized by software consisting of a stored predetermined program.

The main control board 31 includes an input reception means 40, a random number generation means 41, an internal lottery means 42 that performs an internal lottery to determine whether a winning combination is appropriate, a reel control means 43 that controls the rotation of the reels, and all reels. Winning judgment means 44 for judging whether or not a winning combination has won when is stopped, payout control means 45, replay control means 46, setting change means 47, initialization means 48, and game state control means 49, instruction function control means 51, effect main control means 52, and storage means 60. Moreover, the storage means 60 includes a ROM and a RAM.
In addition, the sub-control board 32 includes a performance sub-control means 90 and a sub-side storage means 92 . Also, the sub-side storage means 92 has a ROM and a RAM.

The production main control means 52 and the production sub-control means 90 constitute the production control means 100 . The effect main control means 52 issues an instruction to the effect sub-control means 90 based on the game state, the effect state, and the like. In addition, the effect sub-control means 90 controls the effect stored in the sub-side storage means 92 based on the information on the game state and the effect state transmitted from the effect main control means 52, or the information on whether or not to perform the instruction effect. The data is used to control devices for presentation. The control performed by the effect main control means 52 described in this embodiment may be performed by the effect sub-control means 90 , and the control performed by the effect sub-control means 90 may be performed by the effect main control means 52 . Further, the control performed by the effect control means 100 described in this embodiment may be performed by the instruction function control means 51 , and the control performed by the instruction function control means 51 may be performed by the effect control means 100 .

The input reception means 40 receives insertion of medals for each game, and performs processing for activating the game start operation for the start lever 24 based on the fact that a specified number of medals have been inserted. Specifically, when medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 22, the medal sensor 29 detects the medals, and the insertion acceptance means 40 inserts the inserted medals up to a specified number into the inserted state ( bet state). Further, when the bet button 23 is pressed while medals are credited, the insertion reception means 40 sets the credited medals to the insertion state within a specified number. In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first pressing operation on the start lever 24 that is activated based on the insertion of a specified number of medals is accepted as a game start operation, and the reels 20a to 20c are triggered by this operation. When rotation is started, a lottery such as an internal lottery is conducted.

In addition, the input receiving means 40 controls so that the medals owned by the player are not newly set to the input state in the next game after the game in which the replay was won. Specifically, when a replay wins in the previous game, even if medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 22 in a state in which insertion of medals is accepted, the inserted medals are not set to the inserted state. The inserted medals are credited up to the maximum number of credits (for example, 50). Further, the operation of the bet button 23 is not accepted in the state of accepting the insertion of medals, so that even if the bet button 23 is pressed, the credited medals are not set to the inserted state.

The random number generator 41 generates a random number for lottery. A random value can be generated, for example, based on the count value of an increment counter (a counter that counts numbers so as to cycle through a predetermined count range). In the present embodiment, "random numbers" include not only values that are generated randomly in a mathematical sense, but also values that are generated regularly but are substantially contains values that can act as random numbers.

The internal lottery means 42 performs an internal lottery using the internal lottery table based on the operation of the activated start lever 24 (that is, game start).
In the internal lottery table, each of a plurality of random numbers (for example, 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535) is associated with various winning combinations including small winnings, replays and bonuses, and losing (not winning). are stored in the internal lottery table storage area 61 provided in the ROM of the storage means 60 . In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, as the game state, it is possible to set the normal state, the RBB internal state A, the RBB internal state B, the RBB operating state A, and the RBB operating state B, Six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6 can be set as setting values. hold a lottery.
Incidentally, a small combination is a combination in which a predetermined number of medals corresponding to the winning small combination can be paid out by winning. A replay is a winning combination that allows the player to play the game again without consuming new medals. When the replay wins, the operation of the start lever 24 is validated without using the player's medals, and the game can be started by operating the start lever 24.例文帳に追加

In the internal lottery, a random number for lottery is obtained from a random number generation means 41, the random number is collated with an internal lottery table to determine whether or not a winning combination has been won, and winning is associated with the random number. A role is won. Specifically, the internal lottery table is provided with a plurality of winning areas as shown in FIG. there is The winning area includes a winning area containing one or more winning combinations (associated with a winning combination) and a winning area containing no winning combination (associated with a losing combination). . In addition, the combination of winning combinations included in each winning area is different. All the winning combinations belonging to the winning area associated with the random number obtained from the random number generating means 41 are won as a result of the internal lottery. In the following, in the internal lottery, winning a combination belonging to the winning area is also referred to as "winning the winning area". In addition, the case where neither winning role is won is also referred to as "winning area 'not winning' wins".

As shown in FIG. 3, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, small wins 1 to 35 are prepared as small wins. In addition, as a winning area that includes a small role, "6-choice bell 1" to "6-choice bell 6", "12-choice bell 1" to "12-choice bell 12", "common bell", "cherry 3", "watermelon , "Chance 1", "Chance 2", "Minor Win ALL" and "One Card ALL" are prepared. In addition, the small winning combination 1 to the small winning combination 15, the small winning combination 32 and the small winning combination 35 are 15 medal combinations in which 15 medals are paid out when winning. Also, the small combination 16 is a triple combination in which three medals are paid out when winning. Further, the small winning combination 17 to the small winning combination 31, the small winning combination 33 and the small winning combination 34 are single winning combinations in which one medal is paid out when a prize is won.
In the following, the winning areas "6-choice bell 1" to "6-choice bell 6" and "12-choice bell 1" to "12-choice bell 12" are collectively referred to as the batting order bell (choice role).

The winning area "small winning combination ALL" is a winning area in which all the small winning combinations (small winning combination 1 to small winning combination 35) are won in duplicate. In addition, the winning area "1 card ALL" is a winning area in which all single winnings (small winning combination 17 to small winning combination 31, small winning combination 33, and small winning combination 34) are won in duplicate. In addition, the winning area "6-choice bell 1" to "6-choice bell 6" and the winning area "12-choice bell 1" to "12-choice bell 12" have one or more types of 15-card roles and 1-card roles. It is a winning area that is duplicated and won. In addition, the winning area "common bell" is a winning area in which multiple types of 15-card combinations are won. In addition, the winning area "Cherry 3" is a winning area in which a plurality of types of one-card combinations are won in duplicate. In addition, the winning area "Watermelon" is a winning area in which the small winning combination 16 wins alone. In addition, the winning area "chance 1" is a winning area in which the small win 34 wins alone. In addition, the winning area "Chance 2" is a winning area in which a plurality of types of 15-card combinations are repeatedly won.

Further, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, Replay 1 to Replay 8 are prepared as replays. In addition, "Replay 1A" to "Replay 1C", "Replay 2A" to "Replay 2C", "Replay 3", "Cherry 1", "Cherry 2A" and "Cherry 2B" are prepared as winning areas that include replays. It is

Winning areas "Replay 1A" to "Replay 1C", "Replay 2A" to "Replay 2C", "Replay 3", "Cherry 1", "Cherry 2A" and "Cherry 2B" each have one type of replay alone. It is a winning area that wins in , or a winning area that wins multiple types of replays.

Also, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, a first big bonus (RBB1) to a fourth big bonus (RBB4) are prepared as bonuses. Also, as winning areas associated with bonuses, winning areas "RBB1" to "RBB4" are prepared in which each of RBB1 to RBB4 is individually won.
In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the bonuses (RBB1 to RBB4) are assumed to be the bonuses (RBB1 to RBB4) that are continuously actuating devices related to so-called first-class special bonuses, but other bonuses may be used. Also, other bonuses may be installed together. Also, the loaded bonuses may be set so that they are individually won, or they may be set so that they are won in combination with replays and small wins.

In addition, "not winning" is prepared as a winning area associated with losing.

In each winning area, it is set whether or not winning is possible depending on the game state and the number of inserted medals. In other words, the internal lottery means 42 selects an internal lottery table according to the game state and the number of inserted medals to perform an internal lottery, thereby changing the winning combination. . In FIG. 3, when a game is executed with each number of insertions in each game state, whether or not each winning area can be won is indicated by a "o" mark.

That is, the winning area "not winning" is won when the game state is RBB internal state B and the number of inserted medals is 3, or when the game state is RBB active state A or RBB active state B. Winning is not possible in other game states and the number of inputs.

In addition, the winning areas “Replay 1A” to “Replay 1C”, “Replay 2A” to “Replay 2C”, “Replay 3”, “Cherry 1”, “Cherry 2A”, “Cherry 2B” and “Watermelon” are If the state is general medium state, RBB internal medium state A or RBB internal medium state B (regardless of the number of inputs), winning is not possible in RBB operating state A and RBB operating state B It's like

In addition, the winning areas "6-choice bell 1" to "6-choice bell 6", "12-choice bell 1" to "12-choice bell 12", "common bell", "cherry 3", "chance 1" and "chance The game state 2" is a normal medium state, RBB internal medium state A or RBB internal medium state B, and can be won when the number of inserted medals is three. It is designed not to win in the state and the number of inputs.

In addition, the winning areas "small win ALL" and "1 card ALL" are designed so that a win can be made regardless of the game state and the number of inserted medals.

Winning areas "RBB1" and "RBB2" are designed so that a player can win when the game state is normal and the number of inserted medals is three. So I'm not going to be elected.

In addition, the winning areas "RBB3" and "RBB4" are designed so that winning is possible when the game state is the normal medium state and the number of inserted medals is two. So I'm not going to be elected.

Each winning area is assigned a different winning area number. Each winning area can be identified by the winning area number.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of winning a minor combination is the same for each number of inserted medals in the general medium state, the RBB internal medium state A, and the RBB internal medium state B.

The internal lottery means 42 sets the winning flag corresponding to the winning combination as a result of the internal lottery from the non-winning state (OFF state) to the winning state (ON state). Also, when a plurality of winning combinations are won in duplicate, the winning flags corresponding to the respective winning combinations in duplicate are set from the non-winning state to the winning state. Also, the winning flag setting information is stored in a winning flag storage area 62 provided in the RAM of the storage means 60 .

Winning flags include a winning flag (carry-over possible flag) that allows the winning state to be carried over to subsequent games until a prize is won, and a non-winning state in which the winning state is not carried over to subsequent games regardless of winning. There is a winning flag (non-carryover flag) that is reset to . Big bonuses (RBB1 to RBB4) are associated with the carryover possible flags. Further, the combination to which the carryover impossible flag is associated includes a small combination and a replay. For example, when a big bonus is won in the internal lottery, the internal lottery means 42 carries over the winning state of the big bonus winning flag until the big bonus is won. At this time, the internal lottery means 42 performs an internal lottery to determine the success or failure of a small combination and replay even in a game in which the big bonus winning flag is carried over. That is, in a game in which the winning state of the winning flag of the big bonus is carried over, if a small winning combination or replay is won, the winning flag of the big bonus that has already been won and the small winning combination or replay won in the internal lottery are combined. Winning flags corresponding to two or more kinds of winning combinations are set in a winning state.

In addition, the slot machine 10 has six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6, and the odds of winning a combination differ depending on the difference in setting values. Specifically, when the setting changes, the internal lottery table group consisting of a plurality of internal lottery tables selected according to the game state is changed to the internal lottery table group associated with each setting. Depending on the setting, the internal lottery table group changes with different odds of winning small wins, replays, and bonuses.

The setting change means 47 performs control to change the setting values stored in the setting value storage area 63 provided in the RAM of the storage means 60 . Specifically, a setting change key is inserted into a setting change key cylinder provided inside the slot machine 10, and the slot is opened in a state in which the setting change key (setting change key cylinder) is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the initial position. When the power of the machine 10 is turned on, the setting change means 47 activates the slot machine 10 in the setting change mode. The setting value can be selected from 6 levels from setting 1 to setting 6, and an internal lottery is conducted so that the expected value of the ball output rate increases in order from setting 1 to setting 6. The winning probability of is fluctuating. In the setting change mode, the setting change means 47 performs setting 1→setting 2→ . When the set value is changed and the start lever 24 is pressed, the set value is determined and the determined set value is stored in the set value storage area 63 . Also, by returning the setting change key inserted in the setting change key cylinder to the initial position, it is possible to shift from the setting change mode to the game mode.
In the present embodiment, the level of the set values is expressed in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. FIG.

Also, when the power is turned on while the setting change key cylinder is in the initial position, the slot machine 10 is started in the game mode. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a game can be played in the game mode, but the setting values cannot be changed, and in the setting change mode, the setting values can be changed, but the game cannot be played. It is not possible.

The initialization means 48 performs an initialization process for initializing at least part of the information stored in the RAM of the storage means 60 when the setting value is changed. Specifically, when the setting value is changed, the initialization means 48 performs a process of returning the game state, the game section, and the effect state, which will be described later, to the initial state. That is, when the set value is changed, the game state becomes the normal medium state, the game section becomes the non-advantageous section, and the presentation state becomes the non-advantageous section presentation state. will be in the same state as In the initialization process, the initialization means 48 also initializes information related to effects stored in the RAM of the storage means 60, and the like. The sub-control board 32 also has initialization means (not shown). When the main control board 31 sends a signal notifying that the set value has been changed, the initialization means of the sub-control board 32 The information about the performance stored in the RAM of the sub-side storage means 92 is initialized.
In addition, even if the setting value is changed, the game state, the game section, or the effect state may not return to the initial state. Further, for example, when the game state is the RBB inside state B, even if the setting value is changed, the game state is not returned to the initial state and remains in the RBB inside state B, and other game states (for example, the RBB inside) In the case of medium state A, etc.), the game state may be returned to the general medium state, which is the initial state, when the set value is changed.

The reel control means 43 starts the rotation of the reels 20a to 20c in response to the operation of the start lever 24 activated under the control of the main control board 31 (that is, game start), and activates the reels 20a to 20c. When the stopped stop button 26a to 26c is operated, stop control of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button is performed.

That is, each time one of the stop buttons 26a to 26c is operated, the reel control means 43 determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated button among the first reel 20a to the third reel 20c. , to stop the reel at the determined stop position. In the slot machine 10, when the stop button 26a is operated, the rotation of the first reel 20a is stopped, and when the stop button 26b is operated, the rotation of the second reel 20b is stopped and the stop button 26c is operated. Then, the rotation of the third reel 20c is stopped. Therefore, the stop order of the first reel 20a to the third reel 20c changes depending on the operation order (hitting order) of the stop buttons 26a to 26c.

In the following description, regarding the order of stop operations (order of operation of the stop buttons 26a to 26c), the order of a group of stop operations in which all of the stop buttons 26a to 26c are operated will be referred to as "hitting order". Among the stop operations that constitute the batting order, the first stop operation is the "first stop operation", the second stop operation is the "second stop operation", and the third stop operation is the "third stop operation". ”.

Further, hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 26a, 26b, and 26c for stopping the rotating reels in the order of the first reel 20a, the second reel 20b, and the third reel 20c is defined as "hitting order 1", and the first reel 20a and the third reel are operated. The operation of the stop buttons 26a, 26b, and 26c to stop the rotating reels in the order of 20c and the second reel 20b is set to "batting order 2", and the rotating reels are stopped in the order of the second reel 20b, the first reel 20a, and the third reel 20c. The operation of the stop buttons 26a, 26b, and 26c is defined as "batting order 3", and the operation of the stop buttons 26a, 26b, and 26c for stopping the rotating reels in the order of the second reel 20b, the third reel 20c, and the first reel 20a is designated as "hitting order 4". ”, and the operation of the stop buttons 26a, 26b, 26c for stopping the rotating reels in the order of the third reel 20c, the first reel 20a, and the second reel 20b is set to “hitting order 5”, and the third reel 20c, the second reel 20b, The operations of the stop buttons 26a, 26b, and 26c for stopping the rotating reels in the order of the first reel 20a are referred to as "batting order 6".

In stop control when the stop buttons 26a to 26c are operated, the reel control means 43 stops the reels 20a to 20c so that the winning combination whose winning flag is set to the winning state wins. Specifically, when the winning flag for one winning combination is set to the winning state, the reels 20a to 20c are controlled to stop so that this winning combination wins. Further, in a state in which the winning flags of a plurality of winning combinations are set in a winning state, the reels 20a to 20c are stopped so that a predetermined winning combination wins according to the priority determined for each combination. Let In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority order is determined in the order of "replay>small win>bonus". Then, the reel control means 43 controls the reels 20a so that the symbols forming the winning pattern of the winning combination with the higher priority are displayed on the activated line in preference to the symbols forming the winning pattern of the winning combination with the lower priority. ~20c is stopped.

In addition, when multiple types of small wins are won in the internal lottery, the priority of the candidates for the stop position is determined according to the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on the active line, or in advance for the small wins. There is also a case where the priority is obtained according to the number of medals to be paid out based on the determined payout. When determining the priority of candidates for the stop position according to the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on the active line, the stop position that has the greater number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on the active line has higher priority. A priority is obtained for each stop position candidate so that the priority is higher. When determining the priority of candidates for the stop position according to the number of payouts of medals, the stop position in which the number of payouts of medals increases based on the payout of the small win corresponding to the symbol displayed at the display position on the activated line. The priority of each stop position candidate is obtained so that the position (stop position that can win a small winning combination with a large payout) has a higher priority. However, when determining the priority of candidates for the stop position according to the number of medals paid out, if multiple small wins with the same payout are won, each stop position can win a prize. are treated as having the same priority.

As shown in FIG. 4, a correct hitting order and an incorrect hitting order are set for each batting order bell. FIG. 4 shows the relationship between the mode of the stop operation and the winning combination when each winning area is won in the RBB internal medium state (RBB internal medium state A and RBB internal medium state B). . Each winning area of the batting order bell is designed so that 15 pieces can be won if operated in the correct hitting order when winning in the middle state inside the RBB, and 1 piece can be won if operated in the incorrect hitting order. Roles are made available to win prizes. In other words, when one of the batting order bells is won in the RBB internal middle state, when the stop buttons 26a to 26c are pressed in the correct batting order, a small win 1 to a small win 15, a small win 32 or a small win 35 are won. The order of priority is determined so that the candidate for the stop position that can be played has the highest priority. The order of priority is obtained so that the candidate for the stop position that can win the small winning combination 34 has the highest priority.

Specifically, the winning areas "6-choice bell 1" to "6-choice bell 6" are designed to win a 15-card combination when operated in the correct order. In addition, the winning areas "6-choice bell 1" to "6-choice bell 6" are designed such that if the operation is performed in the order of hitting the wrong answer, either one winning combination or no winning combination is won.

In addition, the winning areas "12-choice bell 1" to "12-choice bell 6" are operated in correct hitting order and include specific symbols (first specific symbols) on the reels 20a to 20c that are stopped first. When the first stop operation is performed while a symbol within a predetermined range (for example, one of symbol numbers 0 to 9) is positioned at a predetermined display position (for example, on the activated line), There are 15 prizes to be won. In other words, it is possible to win a 15-card combination by operating in the order of correct hitting and performing the first stop operation aiming at the first specific symbol. In addition, the winning areas "12-choice bell 1" to "12-choice bell 6" are the first specific reels 20a to 20c that are stopped first when operated in the incorrect hitting order and in the correct hitting order. A first stop operation is performed when a pattern (for example, any one of pattern numbers 10 to 19) within a predetermined range not including any pattern is positioned at a predetermined display position (for example, on the activated line). If the player wins, either one winning combination or no winning combination is awarded.

In addition, the winning areas "12-choice bell 7" to "12-choice bell 12" are operated in the order of correct hitting, and are different from the first specific symbols on the reels 20a to 20c that are stopped first. 2 specific symbols) within a predetermined range (for example, any one of the symbol numbers 10 to 19) is positioned at a predetermined display position (for example, on the effective line), the first stop operation 15-card winnings are awarded when . In other words, it is possible to win a 15-card combination by operating in the order of correct hitting and performing the first stop operation aiming at the second specific symbol. In addition, the winning areas "12-choice bell 7" to "12-choice bell 12" are the second specified reels 20a to 20c that are operated in the correct hitting order and stopped first when operated in the incorrect hitting order. A first stop operation is performed when a pattern (for example, any one of pattern numbers 0 to 9) within a predetermined range not including any pattern is positioned at a predetermined display position (for example, on the effective line). If the player wins, either one winning combination or no winning combination is awarded.

In addition, one correct batting order for each batting order bell is set, and the other five batting orders are defined as incorrect batting orders. In addition, the winning areas "6-choice bell 1" to "6-choice bell 6" have mutually different hitting orders set to the correct hitting order, and the winning areas "12-choice bell 1" to "12-choice bell 6" are different from each other. The batting order is set to the correct batting order, and different batting orders are set to the winning areas "12-choice bell 7" to "12-choice bell 12".

In addition, each winning area of the batting order bell is stopped in a mode (correct batting order and predetermined timing) in which a 15-card combination is won in the RBB internal medium state when winning in the normal medium state is performed. Also, the 1-card role wins (the 15-card role does not win). In addition, each winning area of the batting order bell is in the case of winning in the general medium state and the first stop operation is in accordance with the correct batting order in the RBB internal medium state (the first stop operation is not correct). ), the one-card role always wins (there is no loss).

In addition, the content of the parentheses in FIG. 4 is the order of hitting (and the predetermined state in which the symbols within the predetermined range including the first specific pattern or the second specific pattern are positioned at the predetermined display positions). It shows the winning rate of the 1-card hand and the 15-card hand when the stop operation is performed. For example, the notation “1 card (1/2)” is based on the assumption that the timing of the stop operation is random (within the predetermined range), and the 1 card wins with a probability of 1/2. This indicates that the one-card hand is lost with a probability of 2 (the one-card hand is not won).

The winning judgment means 44 is activated when the reels 20a to 20c stop rotating, and judges whether or not a winning combination has been won based on how the reels 20a to 20c are stopped. Specifically, the symbol combination displayed (stopped display) on the active line by stopping the reels 20a to 20c is collated with the prize determination table stored in the ROM of the storage means 60. FIG. The winning determination table stores the winning form of each winning combination (symbol combination that wins when stopped), and through the collation described above, the presence or absence of a winning combination and the type of winning combination that has won can be determined. do. When a winning combination is won, the main control board 31 executes a winning process corresponding to the winning combination. Specifically, as the winning process, when a small win is won, a payout process is performed, when a replay win is performed, a replay process (replay process) is performed, and when a bonus win is won, the game state is changed. A process for transition (game state transition control process) is performed.

Here, the payout process is a process of paying out the number of medals determined based on the payout determined for each combination when a small winning combination is won, and is performed by the payout control means 45 . The payout control means 45 determines the payout number of medals based on the payout determined for each win when a small winning combination is won, and causes the determined payout number of medals to be paid out to the hopper device. When credits are permitted, the number of credits (the number of credited medals) stored in the credit storage area provided in the RAM of the storage means 60 is used instead of actually paying out medals by the hopper device. ), credit addition processing is performed to add the number of payouts, and medals are virtually paid out.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, 15 medals are paid out when a small winning combination 1 to 15, a small winning combination 32 or a small winning combination 35 is won, and 3 medals are paid out when a small winning combination 16 is won, One medal is paid out when a small winning combination of 17 to 31, a small winning combination of 33 or a small winning combination of 34 is won.

Further, the replay process is a process of setting the same game start standby state as the previous game without requiring insertion of medals owned by the player for the next game when the replay wins. does. If the replay wins, the same number of medals as the number set in the input state in the previous game (the game in which the replay won) will be replaced with the medals in the player's hand (including credited medals). An automatic insertion process for automatically inserting medals without using them is performed, and the next game start operation for the start lever 24 is awaited in a state in which an effective line corresponding to the number of medals inserted by the automatic insertion process is set. Also, when the automatic insertion process is performed, additional medals cannot be inserted.

The gaming state control means 49, as shown in FIG. 5, has a normal state, an RBB internal state A (bonus established state A), an RBB operating state A (bonus state A), and an RBB internal medium state B (bonus established state). B), and a game state transition control process for transitioning the game state between the RBB in-operation state B (bonus state B). As for the game state transition condition, one condition may be defined, or a plurality of conditions may be defined. When a plurality of conditions are defined, the game state may be shifted based on the establishment of one condition among the plurality of predetermined conditions, or a plurality of the predetermined conditions or The game state may be shifted based on the establishment of all.

The general middle state is a game state corresponding to the initial state among a plurality of types of game states, and the specified number of insertions (specified number) is set to two and three. Further, it is possible to shift from the general medium state to the RBB internal medium state A and the RBB internal medium state B. Specifically, in the general state, when RBB1 or RBB2 is won, the state shifts to RBB internal state A, and when RBB3 or RBB4 is won, the state shifts to RBB internal state B. Further, in the general medium state, an internal lottery table in which RBB1 and RBB2 are set as lottery targets or an internal lottery table in which RBB3 and RBB4 are set as lottery targets is referred to according to the number of inserted medals. A lottery will be held.

Specifically, when a game is played with three medals inserted in the normal middle state, RBB1 and RBB2 are set as the lottery targets, and RBB3 and RBB4 are excluded from the lottery targets. Refer to the internal lottery table. Then an internal lottery will be held. Further, when a game is played with two medals inserted in the normal state, RBB3 and RBB4 are set as the lottery targets, and RBB1 and RBB2 are excluded from the lottery targets by referring to the internal lottery table. A lottery will be held.

The RBB internal middle state A is a game state that is shifted to when RBB1 or RBB2 is won in the internal lottery, and the prescribed number of inserts is set to 2 or 3. Further, in the RBB internal medium state A, an internal lottery is performed with reference to an internal lottery table selected according to the number of inserted medals from among a plurality of internal lottery tables in which RBB1 to RBB4 are excluded from lottery targets. .

Further, in the RBB internal middle state A, the lottery flag corresponding to RBB1 or RBB2 is maintained in the winning state until RBB1 or RBB2 is won, and when the symbol combination indicating the winning form of RBB1 or RBB2 is displayed on the activated line. , the game state control means 49 shifts the game state from the state A during RBB inside to the state A during RBB operation. Further, in this embodiment, RBB1 and RBB2 are effective bonuses only when the number of inserted medals is three. It is possible to win RBB1 or RBB2, but when a game is played with two inserted coins in RBB internal state A, RBB1 and RBB2 cannot be won (activated).

The RBB internal medium state B is a game state that is shifted to when RBB3 or RBB4 is won in the internal lottery, and the prescribed number of inserted coins is set to 2 or 3. In addition, in the RBB internal medium state B, an internal lottery is performed with reference to an internal lottery table selected according to the number of inserted medals from among a plurality of internal lottery tables in which RBB1 to RBB4 are excluded from lottery targets. .

Further, in the RBB internal medium state B, the lottery flag corresponding to RBB3 or RBB4 is maintained in the winning state until RBB3 or RBB4 is won, and when the symbol combination indicating the winning form of RBB3 or RBB4 is displayed on the activated line. , the game state control means 49 shifts the game state from the RBB internal state B to the RBB active state B. Further, in this embodiment, RBB3 and RBB4 are effective bonuses only when the number of inserted medals is two. It is possible to win RBB3 or RBB4, but when the game is played with three inserted coins in RBB internal state B, RBB3 and RBB4 cannot be won (activated).

The RBB in-operation state A is a game state that shifts when the symbol combination indicating the winning form of RBB1 or RBB2 is displayed on the active line, and the prescribed number of insertions is set to three. In addition, in the RBB active state A, an internal lottery is performed with reference to an internal lottery table in which the lottery areas "non-win", "minor win ALL" and "one card ALL" are set as lottery targets. In addition, in the RBB operating state A, it is determined whether or not the termination condition is satisfied based on the total number of medals paid out in the RBB operating state A, and the total number exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 66). When the medals are paid out, the game state control means 49 terminates the RBB operating state A and shifts the game state to the normal state.
In this embodiment, the termination condition of the RBB operating state A is determined by the total number of medals paid out, but the termination condition is determined by the number of games played in the RBB operating state A, the number of winnings of small wins, and the like. may have been

The RBB in-operation state B is a game state that shifts when the symbol combination indicating the winning form of RBB3 or RBB4 is displayed on the active line, and the prescribed number of insertions is set to three. Further, in the RBB operating state B, an internal lottery is performed with reference to an internal lottery table in which the lottery areas "non-win", "minor combination ALL" and "one card ALL" are set as lottery targets. In addition, in the RBB operating state B, it is determined whether or not the end condition is satisfied based on the total number of medals paid out in the RBB operating state B, and the total number exceeds a predetermined number (for example, two). When the medals are paid out, the game state control means 49 terminates the RBB operating state B and shifts the game state to the normal state.
In this embodiment, the termination condition of the RBB operating state B is determined by the total number of medals paid out, but the termination condition is determined by the number of games played in the RBB operating state B, the number of winnings of small wins, and the like. may have been

The instruction function control means 51 includes a game section control means 80 , an effect state control means 81 , and a privilege imparting means 82 . The instruction function control means 51 performs processing related to the operation of the instruction function that assists the winning of the specific combination in the advantageous section. Specifically, when a predetermined winning combination is won, the instruction function control means 51 determines whether or not to perform an instruction effect for assisting the winning of this winning combination. More specifically, when the batting order bell is won, the instruction function control means 51 determines whether or not to perform an instruction effect (batting order navigation effect) for announcing the correct batting order and assisting the winning of the 15-card hand. . Based on this determination, the effect control means 100 causes the liquid crystal display 13 to execute the batting order navigation effect.

As shown in FIG. 6, the game zone control means 80 performs a game zone shift control process for shifting the game zone between a non-advantageous zone and an advantageous zone according to the progress of the game. The non-advantageous section is a game section corresponding to the initial state among the plurality of types of game sections. In the non-advantageous section, the privilege providing means 82 performs an advantageous section transition lottery, and when the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the game section control means 80 shifts the game section to the advantageous section. Also, the advantageous section is a game section in which an upper limit (here, 1500 times) is set for the number of times the game can be played. Further, when the game section is set as the non-advantageous section, the instruction performance cannot be performed, and only when the game section is set as the advantageous section, the instruction performance can be performed. The game zone control means 80 ends the advantageous zone when the number of times the game is played in the advantageous zone reaches 1500, which is the upper limit, and shifts the game zone to the non-advantageous zone.

In the non-advantageous section, the privilege granting means 82 performs a lottery (advantageous section transition lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a transition to the advantageous section at a predetermined opportunity. Specifically, according to the result of the internal lottery (based on the winning of a predetermined role (winning area)), the privilege granting means 82 performs a lottery (advantageous area shift lottery) to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous area. I do. Then, when winning the advantageous zone shift lottery, the game zone control means 80 shifts the game zone from the non-advantageous zone to the advantageous zone.

In addition, the game interval control means 80 stores the advantageous interval game number counter 65 provided in the RAM of the storage means 60, triggered by the game start operation on the start lever 24, every time a game is played in the advantageous interval. Increment processing is performed to add "1" to the value as a value corresponding to one game. The game section control means 80 does not add to the advantageous section game number counter 65 in the non-advantageous section. Further, at the time when the non-advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section, the stored value of the advantageous section game number counter 65 is "0". Then, when the value stored in the advantageous interval game number counter 65 reaches the threshold value (upper limit value) “1500”, the game interval control means 80 deems that the condition for ending the advantageous interval is satisfied, and removes the game interval from the advantageous interval. Move to an advantageous section. That is, the upper limit of the number of games played in the advantageous section is set to 1500, so that the number of games exceeding 1500 is not played continuously in the advantageous section.

In addition, the game interval control means 80 updates the stored value of the difference number counter 64 provided in the RAM of the storage means 60 with the difference number of medals in the advantageous interval, and sets a value corresponding to the number of payout medals (for example, 15). ``15'' when there is a payout of medals, and ``0'' when there is no payout without winning any combination). A value (for example, "3" when three cards are inserted) is subtracted to obtain the calculation result of the difference number in the game, and this calculation result is added to the stored value of the difference number counter 64. Perform update processing. Incidentally, the game section control means 80 does not perform addition to the difference number counter 64 in the non-advantageous section. Further, at the point of time when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section, the stored value of the difference number counter 64 is "0". Then, when the stored value of the difference number counter 64 exceeds a threshold value (for example, "2400"), the game interval control means 80 determines that the condition for ending the advantageous interval is satisfied, and shifts the game interval from the advantageous interval to the non-advantageous interval. Move to section. The stored value of the difference number counter 64 is controlled so as not to fall below the initial value "0". If no combination is won and no medals are paid out, the calculation result of the difference number in the game becomes "-3", and the calculation result of the difference number is added to the stored value of the difference number counter 64 to the initial value. Although it falls below "0", the stored value of the difference number counter after updating is set so that counting is stopped with the initial value "0" as the lower limit. In other words, an upper limit is set for the number of medals that can be obtained in the advantageous section, and the number of medals that have decreased the most in the advantageous section is set to "0" as the reference, and the number of medals increased from the reference exceeds 2400. The advantageous section ends when In addition, if there is a winning replay in a game, it will be treated as if there was a payout of medals equivalent to the prescribed number of inputs in the game in which the replay was won, and the difference number will be calculated, and the replay winning will be free of charge. For the next game to be provided, even if actual medals are not inserted, it may be treated as if medals corresponding to the prescribed number of inserted medals for the game have been inserted, and the difference may be obtained.

In addition, the advantageous section indicator 18 is turned off during non-advantageous sections and lit during advantageous sections.
It should be noted that the advantageous section indicator 18 does not have to be lit at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section, but may be made to be lit before the first instruction effect is performed. In addition, once the light is turned on, it will not be turned off until the end of the advantageous section.

As shown in FIG. 6, the production state control means 81 has a production state transition that shifts the production state among a plurality of types of production states including a non-advantageous section production state, a non-AT production state, a CZ production state, and an AT production state. Perform control processing. Also, the AT effect state includes a special effect state and a normal AT effect state. One condition may be defined as the transition condition of the effect state, or a plurality of conditions may be defined. When a plurality of conditions are defined, the production state may be shifted when one condition out of the plurality of predetermined conditions is satisfied, and some or all of the plurality of predetermined conditions The production state may be shifted based on the establishment.

The non-advantageous section rendering state is a rendering state corresponding to the initial state among a plurality of types of rendering states. In the non-advantageous section, the effect state control means 81 sets the effect state to the non-advantageous section effect state. In the non-advantageous section effect state (non-advantageous section), the privilege granting means 82 performs the advantageous section transition lottery as described above. A means 81 shifts the production state to a non-AT production state.

The non-AT production state is a production state that basically shifts when the advantageous section starts, and at the start of the advantageous section, the probability of shifting to the non-AT production state is higher than the probability of shifting to another production state. is set too high.

Also, in the non-AT effect state, the batting order navigation effect is executed less frequently than in the AT effect state, and the batting order navigation effect is almost not performed or not performed at all.

The effect state control means 81 shifts the effect state to the CZ effect state at a predetermined opportunity in the non-AT effect state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, an upper limit (a so-called ceiling) is set for the number of times the game is played in the non-AT effect state. , the effect state control means 81 shifts the effect state to the CZ effect state. Further, the upper limit of the number of games played in the non-AT effect state as the ceiling is determined by lottery when the non-AT effect state is started. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of games played in the non-AT effect state is determined from 200, 300, 400, or 500 times by the lottery. The number of games executed in the non-AT effect state (the number of games remaining until reaching the ceiling) may be managed by providing a counter for counting the number of games in the RAM of the storage means 60, for example. In the non-AT production state, the privilege granting means 82 performs a lottery (CZ lottery), and when the CZ lottery is won, the effect state control means 81 may shift the effect state to the CZ effect state.

The CZ rendering state is a rendering state in which the degree of expectation for transition to the AT rendering state is higher than that in the non-AT rendering state. In other words, the CZ effect state is a state of effect more advantageous to the player than the non-AT effect state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when a plurality (predetermined number) of achievement conditions are achieved in the non-AT effect state and the CZ effect state, the privilege granting means 82 grants the right to shift to the AT effect state as a privilege. The degree of expectation that each achievement condition is achieved is higher in the CZ effect state than in the non-AT effect state. In addition, for example, in the non-AT effect state and the CZ effect state, the privilege granting means 82 determines whether or not to shift to the AT effect state according to the result of the internal lottery (based on the winning of a predetermined combination (winning area)). A lottery (AT lottery) to determine is performed, and when the AT lottery is won, the right to shift to the AT production state as a privilege may be granted, and in this case, the CZ production state rather than the non-AT production state. A higher expectation for winning the AT lottery may be set for .

In addition, in the CZ effect state, the batting order navigation effect is performed less frequently than in the AT effect state, and the batting order navigation effect is almost not performed or not performed at all.

In the non-AT rendering state or CZ rendering state, when the transition to the AT rendering state is determined (when the right to shift is granted), the rendering state control means 81 shifts the rendering state to the AT rendering state. In the AT effect state, when the batting order bell is won, the instruction function control means 51 determines the execution of the batting order navigation effect for notifying the correct batting order. When execution of the batting order navigation effect is determined, the effect control means 100 causes the liquid crystal display 13 to display the correct batting order.

The continuation of the AT effect state is managed based on an AT stock number counter 66 and an AT game number counter 67 provided in the RAM of the storage means 60. - 特許庁The privilege giving means 82 adds a predetermined value "1" to the AT stock number counter 66 when deciding to give the right to shift to the AT effect state in the non-AT effect state or the CZ effect state. Further, when the stored value of the AT stock number counter 66 is "1" or more in the non-AT effect state or the CZ effect state, the effect state control means 81 shifts the effect state to the AT effect state. Specifically, the effect state control means 81 shifts the effect state to the special effect state.

The special effect state is a state of effect that basically shifts when the AT effect state is started. In the special effect state, the privilege granting means 82 performs a lottery (AT point granting lottery) for determining whether or not to grant AT points according to the result of the internal lottery every game, and according to the result of the AT point granting lottery. AT point will be given to each player. Also, the AT points are accumulated in an AT point counter 68 provided in the RAM of the storage means 60, and when the stored value of the AT point counter 68 reaches a predetermined value "100", the privilege granting means 82 adds a predetermined value “1” to the AT stock number counter 66 and subtracts a predetermined value “100” from the stored value of the AT point counter 68 . In the AT point grant lottery, not only is it determined whether or not to grant AT points, but also the number of points to be granted if so is determined. It is added to the stored value of 68. In addition, the AT point grant lottery (giving AT points) is executed even in the normal AT effect state, but in the special effect state, the degree of expectation for granting AT points is higher than in the normal AT effect state. Compared to the AT production state, the production state makes it easier to obtain AT points. In other words, the special effect state is an effect state in which the stock number of the AT effect state tends to increase (the duration of the AT effect state tends to increase) compared to the normal AT effect state.

In the special effect state, the guaranteed number of games is set to 10, and 10 or more games are always executed. In addition, in the special performance state, after 10 games have been played, a lottery (special performance end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the special performance state is carried out every time the batting order bell is won in an internal lottery. When the lottery for ending the special performance state is won, the performance state control means 81 shifts the performance state to the normal AT performance state.

When starting the normal AT effect state, the effect state control means 81 subtracts a predetermined value "1" from the AT stock number counter 66, and sets the value "20" corresponding to the number of games for one set to the AT game state. A number counter 67 is set. Also, the effect state control means 81 subtracts "1" from the stored value of the AT game number counter 67 each time a game is executed in the normal AT effect state. Further, when the stored value of the AT game number counter 67 reaches "0" in the normal AT effect state (when one set of games is executed in the normal AT effect state), the effect state control means 81 changes the AT stock number The stored value of the counter 66 is referred to. If the stored value of the AT stock number counter 66 referred to is "1" or more, the effect state control means 81 subtracts a predetermined value "1" from the stored value of the AT stock number counter 66, and the game for one set is played. A value "20" corresponding to the number of times is set in the AT game number counter 67, and one set of normal AT effect state is started again. On the other hand, if the stored value of the referenced AT stock number counter 66 is "0", the effect state control means 81 terminates the normal AT effect state and shifts to another effect state. Here, the fact that the stored value of the AT stock number counter 66 reaches "0" in the normal AT effect state is one of the conditions for ending the AT effect state, and the stored value of the AT stock number counter 66 becomes "0". When reaching 0, if other conditions for enabling the AT performance state to continue are not established, the performance state control means shifts the performance state from the normal AT performance state to the non-advantageous section performance state. . Also, at this time, the game zone control means 80 shifts the game zone from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the continuation of the AT effect state is managed by the number of games played in the AT effect state (the number of sets of the normal AT effect state). It may be managed based on the difference in the number of medals obtained in the effect state, the number of batting order navigation effects, or the like.

The instruction function control means 51 initializes the information stored in the RAM of the storage means 60 as the information relating to the instruction function when the advantageous section ends and the game section shifts to the non-advantageous section. conversion processing. Specifically, the instruction function control means 51 controls the stored value of the advantageous section game number counter 65, the stored value of the difference number counter 64, the stored value of the AT stock number counter 66, the stored value of the AT game number counter 67, and the AT points. The memory value of the counter 68 and the flag (lottery result) related to the lottery related to the instruction function are initialized. That is, the information related to the instruction function is not carried over over a plurality of advantageous sections. Further, when the initialization means 48 performs the above-described initialization processing that is performed when the setting value is changed, the information related to the instruction effect shown here is also initialized.

When the performance state is the AT performance state, when the batting order bell is won, the liquid crystal display 13 and the speaker provide an instruction performance (batting order navigation performance) to notify the correct batting order and assist the winning of the 15-card hand. 14 or the like is controlled to be executed. When the batting order bell wins and the stop buttons 26a to 26c are pressed in accordance with the correct batting order notified by the instruction performance, 15 winning combinations are guaranteed to win 15 medals. .
Incidentally, when the instruction effect is performed, information indicating the correct hitting order is also displayed on the 7-segment display of the game information display section 17 .

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the instruction function control means 51 (effect control means 100) controls the lottery related to the instruction function (AT effect state such as CZ lottery and AT lottery) in a game in which the number of inserted medals is three. However, in games where the number of medals inserted is two, the lottery related to the instruction function and the batting order navigation effect will be processed. Such processing is not performed. Hereinafter, the lottery, the batting order navigation effect (instruction effect), and the like related to the instruction function will be referred to as processing related to the instruction function.
The instruction function control means 51 (performance control means 100) performs processing related to the instruction function when the game state is the RBB internal state B, but the game state is the general state, the RBB internal state A, and the RBB operation. In the middle state A or the RBB in-operation state B, the processing related to the indicating function is not performed. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the processing relating to the instruction function is executed only when the game state is the RBB internal middle state B and the game is played with three medals inserted. In other game states and the number of inputs, the processing related to the instruction function is not executed. In other words, in the state B during RBB operation, the game played with two medals inserted has a higher performance (medal acquisition) related to the instruction function (instruction effect) than the game played with three medals inserted. (expectations related to Furthermore, in other words, in a game played with two inserted medals, expectations for winning medals based on the instruction performance are lower than in a game played with three inserted medals.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, an instruction effect can be executed in a game performed with three medals inserted in the AT effect state, but in a game performed with two medals inserted in the AT effect state Instruction production is not executed. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game is played with two medals inserted, the batting order bell is not won (see FIG. 3), so the game is played with two medals inserted. However, even if the batting order bell can be won when the game is played with two medals inserted, the game is played with two medals inserted. is performed, the batting order navigation effect may not be executed.

The processing related to the instruction function includes an advantageous zone shift lottery, a process of shifting a game zone to an advantageous zone based on winning the advantageous zone shift lottery, and the like. Note that the process of shifting to the advantageous zone based on the winning of the advantageous zone transition lottery or the advantageous zone transition lottery may be referred to as the process associated with the advantageous zone transition. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the instruction function control means 51 (effect control means 100) performs processing related to the advantageous section according to the result of the internal lottery in the game performed with three medals inserted in the non-advantageous section. However, in a game where two medals are inserted in a non-advantageous section, processing related to the advantageous section is not performed regardless of which winning mode is obtained as a result of the internal lottery. there is Therefore, in a game in which the number of inserted medals is two, the transition to the advantageous section in which the instruction effect can be executed is not determined. In other words, a game played with two inserted medals has a lower performance regarding instruction performance than a game played with three inserted medals.

In addition, the instruction function control means 51 can perform a lottery such as a CZ lottery, an AT lottery, or an AT point award lottery in a game played with three medals inserted. In games where the player is playing, these lotteries are not performed. The command function control means 51 also includes a counter that counts the number of remaining games up to the ceiling in the non-AT effect state, an AT stock number counter 66, and an AT game number counter 66 in a game that is played with three medals inserted. The stored values of the counter 67, AT point counter 68, etc. can be updated, but in a game in which two medals are inserted, these counters are not updated.

In addition, in a game performed with two medals inserted, a process related to the instruction function may be performed. However, even in that case, it is assumed that the performance regarding the instruction performance is lower than that of the game performed with three medals inserted. For example, when the AT lottery is used as the process related to the instruction function, the performance related to the instruction effect is lowered, for example, the AT lottery is executed less frequently, or the AT lottery is executed at the same frequency. However, the odds of winning are low.

The effect control means 100 controls image display on the display device 13, which is one of the effect devices. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to play a predetermined game by setting the number of inserted medals to either the first specified number (three) or the second specified number (two). In the predetermined game, when the first specified number or the second specified number of medals are inserted (bet), the operation of the start lever 24 is validated. Next, when the activated start lever 24 is operated, a game (1 game) is started. Next, with the start of the game, the reels 20a to 20c start rotating and an internal lottery is executed to determine whether one of the winning combinations wins or loses (no win). Next, when the reels 20a to 20c are stopped, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination won by the internal lottery is displayed on the active line (if it is determined that the winning combination has been won), the winning combination that won A process (winning process) corresponding to is executed, and one game ends. On the other hand, if the result of the internal lottery is a loss (no winning), or if it is determined that the winning combination won by the internal lottery was not won, one game ends when the reels 20a to 20c stop. . Hereinafter, a game in which the first specified number (three) of medals are inserted is referred to as a "three bet game", and a game in which the second specified number (two) of medals is inserted is referred to as "two It is called hanging game.

When the two-ply game is started, the production control means 100 executes the two-ply game production and sends a special image to the display device 13 to inform (inform, show, suggest) that it is a two-ply game. display. An example of the special image will be described later, but to inform that it is a two-play game means that the fact is directly displayed, or even if that effect is not directly displayed, a special image dedicated to the two-play game It refers to the fact that it is a display, etc., and it is assumed that the player can recognize that it is a two-play game.

When the start lever 24 activated by inserting the second specified number of medals is operated, the effect control means 100 displays a special image with the operation of the start lever 24 as a trigger. A special image is displayed along with the start of the double bet game, and by notifying that the double bet game is being performed, the player sees the display of the special image and starts the double bet game (instruction effect It can be recognized that a game with low performance related to) is being played.

(special image)
Here, some examples of special images (double-play game images) are shown with reference to FIG. Note that the special image is not limited to a still image, and may be an image with movement (moving image).
FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a special image. This special image is a special background image. The background image is an image depicting scenery, buildings, automobiles, characters, symbols, or a combination thereof.
FIG. 7B is a diagram showing another example of the special image. This special image is an image having the special image shown in FIG. 7(a) and a character (special character image) reading "Double-playing game". It should be noted that, as in the special image of FIG. 7(b), when the special character image "during a double-playing game" is included, the background image may be used in an effect other than the double-playing game effect. good.
Note that when the special image is displayed/not displayed, the special image shown in FIG. 7(a) or FIG. 7(b) is displayed/not displayed. A character image (only) may be regarded as a special image, and the special image may be displayed/not displayed. Also, although illustration is omitted, in the case of a special image including a special character image as shown in FIG. 7B, the background image may be of a single color (for example, white or black).

Next, the timing for setting the state in which the special image is not displayed will be described. Hereinafter, when we say "to make the image not to be displayed", in addition to hiding the image itself, another image is placed on a layer higher than the layer on which the image is placed (drawn), and the image is displayed. This includes the case where the images arranged in the lower layers are made invisible by overlapping the .

When a replay is won as a result of an internal lottery in a two-slot game, when each reel stops in a predetermined stop mode (when a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is displayed on an active line), then in a two-slot game. The same number of medals (that is, two medals) as the inserted number are automatically inserted, and the operation of the start lever 24 for the next game is validated. In other words, a winning determination is made based on the stopped symbols, and when it is determined that a replay has been won, processing corresponding to the winning combination (replay processing) is performed, and the operation of the start lever 24 for the next game is validated. . It should be noted that, for a game that wins a replay, the time when the reel is stopped and it is determined that the replay has won (that is, before the actual automatic insertion) may be the end of the game, and the time when the replay process is completed (that is, the actual (after the automatic insertion of ) may be regarded as the end of the game.
In this case, assuming that in the double bet game winning the replay, a special When the image is not displayed, although it is determined that the replay is won and the next game is also a two-coin game, the fact is not notified (hidden state). Therefore, the player may feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when a replay is won in a double-bet game, the effect control means 100 keeps the effect even after the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop mode (the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is displayed on the activated line). ), continue to display the special image. Therefore, when the replay is won in the double-bet game, the display of the special image is continued even after the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop mode, so that the player can be prevented from having the above-mentioned sense of incongruity. .

In addition, if a small combination is won as a result of an internal lottery in a double-bet game and a small combination is won (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed on the active line), the prize corresponding to the small combination is won. When the process (payout process) is performed, the double bet game ends. In addition, when a small winning combination is won but no prize is won, the two-coin game ends when each reel stops. Therefore, even if the special image is not displayed with the end of the two-coin game as a trigger, the player will not feel a sense of incongruity as in the case of winning the replay. However, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when a small combination is won in a double bet game, the effect control means 100 determines whether or not the small combination has been won (the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed on the activated line). ), the display of the special image is continued even after the end of the two bet game.
With this configuration, when a phenomenon disadvantageous to the player occurs due to the playing of the double-bet game (when the result is disadvantageous to the player), there are two causes for the phenomenon. It is possible to easily specify that a stacking game has been played. A specific description will be given. Consider a scene in which a transition to an AT performance state is determined when a minor combination is won and a minor combination is won (when a symbol combination corresponding to the minor combination is displayed on an effective line) in a predetermined game. In the game, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination was displayed on the effective line, but it is assumed that the shift to the AT effect state was not determined because the combination was two-coin instead of three-coin. At this time, as in the present embodiment, if the display of the special image is continued even after the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop mode, it is possible that the transition to the AT effect state was not determined in the game. It can be easily identified that the cause is that the game was played with two pieces. In a predetermined game, when a replay is won and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is displayed on the activated line, the shift to the AT effect state is determined. The same is true when playing a game.

In addition, the effect control means 100 continues the display of the special image even after the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop mode when the result of the internal lottery is not won in the double bet game. In addition, when the bonus is won in the double bet game, the effect control means 100 determines whether or not the bonus is won (whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is displayed on the activated line). The display of the special image may be continued even after stopping in the stop mode of . In addition, when a bonus is won in the double-bet game, the special image is not displayed when the winning is determined, and an image notifying that the bonus is won is displayed. good.

Regardless of the result of the internal lottery or whether or not a predetermined winning combination has been won, the process of continuing the display of the special image even after the end of the two-coin game (even after the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop mode). In the case of unification, the configuration can be simplified, so development efficiency can be improved and storage capacity pressure can be prevented.

Next, consider a case where the display of the special image is continued until, for example, a predetermined operation relating to the next game is performed. In that case, when the player quits the game after finishing the double bet game, the display of the special image is continued until the predetermined operation is performed. The display of this special image notifies the player that a game with low performance regarding the instruction effect has been played. Other players may see the special image displayed and avoid playing games with the gaming machine. The processing related to the instruction function is not performed only in the relevant game (2-ply game) played with 2-ply. penalties do not carry over). However, if the special image continues to be displayed even after the two-slot game ends, it may give the impression that the next game does not have the processing related to the instruction function.
In the above description, it is assumed that the instruction function is not performed only for the game that is played with two cards. Such processing may be prevented (that is, the penalty may be carried over).

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect control means 100 satisfies a predetermined condition in a state in which the special image continues to be displayed after the end of the double bet game (after the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop mode). Then, a demonstration effect is executed, the special image is not displayed, and a demonstration image (demonstration screen) is displayed. Here, the predetermined condition means that the display condition of the demo image is satisfied, and the state in which the player has not played the game (the state in which the predetermined operation to the gaming machine has not been input) after the game ends. ) continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 minute) (when a predetermined period of time has passed without a game being played). Note that the demo image is, for example, an image that attracts the player's interest, and includes still images, moving images, and the like. In this way, if a predetermined condition is satisfied while the special image is being displayed, the special image is switched to the demonstration image, so that the player can avoid playing the game by seeing the special image being displayed. reduce the likelihood of
Here, the display condition of the demonstration image (timing of transition to the demonstration image) will be specifically described. When a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has passed since the third stop operation of the stop button was performed, the display condition for the demonstration image is satisfied and the demonstration image is displayed. After the third stop operation of the stop button is performed, it may be from the timing when the last stop button depression is detected, and it is detected that the last stop button is released. It may be from the timing when the stop of rotation of all reels is detected, and it may be detected that the last stop button is released It may be, for example, from the end of the production executed as a trigger.

In the above description, the meeting of the predetermined condition is defined as the meeting of the demonstration image display condition, but the following may be considered. That is, the establishment of a predetermined condition may be defined as the detection of recovery from a power failure (power failure). In the state where the display of the special image is continued after the end of the double-bet game, the effect control means 100, when detecting the recovery from the power failure, sets the state in which the special image is not displayed and the normal image ( normal screen). In addition, the normal image is an image different from the special image and the demonstration image, for example, the image that is basically displayed in the production state during the stay (the image with the highest display ratio (probability)), or It is an image or the like to be displayed at the start of the effect state. In other words, the normal image is an image displayed between the three-piece game and the three-piece game in the effect state during stay.

Further, for example, in a predetermined effect state (for example, AT effect state), when a double-bet game is performed and the display of the special image is continued, even if a predetermined condition (demonstration image display condition) is established. Even if it does, the display of the special image may be continued (that is, the transition to the demo screen may not be performed). Since it is advantageous for the player while staying in the AT presentation state and the possibility of the player quitting the game is low, there is little need to hide the special image in consideration of the next player. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to the notification of the fact that a two-game game has been played rather than to hide the special image. Although the AT effect state is mentioned as the predetermined effect state, for example, in the effect state other than the AT effect state, the execution of the effect executed to notify the result of whether or not the transition to the AT effect state has been decided. It can be inside. Further, after the bonus is won, if the special image continues to be displayed after the double bet game is played while the bonus is in operation, the special image will not be displayed even if a predetermined condition is satisfied. You may make it continue. With the above configuration, the state in which the special image is displayed for a long time (for example, one minute or more) without transitioning to the demo screen can attract the player. In the double-bet game, even if the special image continues to be displayed after the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop mode and the bonus is won, the special image continues to be displayed even if a predetermined condition is satisfied. You can let it run. This is because the possibility of the player quitting the game is low because the player has won the bonus, and there is little need to hide the special image in consideration of the next player.

In addition, when the display condition of the demonstration image is established in the case where the display of the special image is continued in a predetermined effect state (for example, the AT effect state) etc., the demonstration image is not displayed. The display of the special image may be continued, and the sound may be automatically silenced so that the production sound (BGM) or the like is not output. At this time, when the recovery from the power failure is detected after the end of the double bet game and before the display condition of the demonstration image is established, the normal image in a predetermined effect state (AT effect state) is displayed. However, if the display condition for the demonstration image is satisfied in that state, the display of the normal image is continued without displaying the demonstration image, and the sound is automatically silenced.
In addition, when the display of the special image is continued in a predetermined effect state (for example, the AT effect state) or the like in which a double-bet game is played, if the display condition of the demonstration image is established, the special image is not displayed. At the same time, a demonstration image may be displayed and the sound may be automatically silenced. At this time, when the recovery from the power interruption is detected after the double-bet game and before the demonstration image display condition is satisfied, the normal image is displayed in a predetermined effect state (AT effect state). However, when the display condition for the demonstration image is satisfied in that state, the normal image is not displayed, the demonstration image is displayed, and the sound is automatically silenced.

Next, after the end of the double bet game (after the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop mode), a predetermined condition is satisfied while the special image is being displayed, and an image different from the special image (demonstration image and ) is displayed.
(A) When a demo image is displayed via a special image based on winning a replay in a double-bet game.
The effect control means 100, when the next game start operation (the operation that triggers the start of the next game) is performed while the demonstration image is being displayed (that is, while the special image is not being displayed). Triggered by the start operation, the demo image is not displayed, and the special image is displayed (redisplayed). Here, the next game is a double bet game based on replay winning in the double bet game. Also, the start operation is the operation (tilting, pressing) of the start lever 24 . When the operation of the start lever 24 is detected, the effect control means 100 makes a state in which the demonstration image is not displayed and displays a special image. It should be noted that the same processing is performed when a normal image (normal image after recovery from power failure) is displayed instead of the demonstration image.

In this way, the special image is displayed again at the time of the start operation of the next game (2-ply game), so the player can recognize that the game is a 2-ply game. In particular, after winning a replay in a two-ply game, if the player has stopped playing the game before starting the next game, the next player will be able to play the two-ply game with the previous player. You can recognize that you have won the replay.

In the above, the processing in the case where the demonstration image is displayed has been shown. The normal image may be displayed at the end of the demo image)). Similarly, when the normal image is displayed via the demo image in this way, when the next game start operation is performed, the normal image is not displayed with the start operation as a trigger, and the special image is displayed. display an image.

(b) When a demo image is displayed via a special image based on winning or not winning a small winning combination in a double-bet game.
The effect control means 100 is in a state where the demonstration image is displayed (that is, while the special image is not displayed). Triggered by the start operation, the demo image is not displayed, and an image (three-bet game image) displayed during execution of the three-bet game is displayed. If the normal image (normal image after power failure recovery) is displayed instead of the demo image, the normal image is not displayed with the start operation as a trigger, and the 3-ply game image is displayed. Let
On the other hand, in the state where the demonstration image is displayed, the effect control means 100, when the start operation (operation of the start lever 24) of the next game with two pieces is performed (again), the demonstration image is displayed with the start operation as a trigger. is not displayed, and a special image is displayed. It should be noted that the same processing is performed when a normal image (normal image after recovery from power failure) is displayed instead of the demo image.

In the above description, the processing in the case where the demonstration image is displayed has been shown. A normal image (or a special image) may be displayed along with the elapse of a predetermined period of time (end of demo image for one turn). Even when the normal image (or the special image) is displayed via the demo image in this way, when the next game start operation is performed with the three-ply game, the three-ply game is started with the start operation as a trigger. An image is displayed, and on the other hand, when the start operation of the next game is performed with two pieces, the special image is displayed with the start operation as a trigger.

The gaming machine of this embodiment is
a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are arranged;
stop buttons provided corresponding to the plurality of reels;
an internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery to determine the suitability of a role;
Winning judgment means for judging the winning of a winning combination based on the stop mode of the plurality of reels;
Reel control means for rotating the plurality of reels for each game, and using the operation of the stop button as a trigger to stop the reels in a stop mode according to the result of an internal lottery;
an instruction function control means for controlling the execution of an instruction performance for assisting the winning of a predetermined combination;
A gaming machine comprising an effect control means for controlling display of an image on a display device,
In a predetermined game, it is possible to play the game by inserting either the first specified number or the second specified number of game values,
A game performed by inserting the second specified number of game values has lower performance related to the instruction effect than a game performed by inserting the first specified number of game values,
The production control means is
When the game with the second specified number is started, the display device displays a special image notifying that the game is played with the second specified number,
When a replay is won in the second prescribed number of games, the display of the special image is continued even after the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop mode,
When a predetermined condition is met while the display of the special image is continued, the special image is not displayed,
When the next game start operation is input while the special image is not displayed, the special image is displayed.

The gaming machine of the present embodiment can appropriately control notification of information regarding games played in the second prescribed number. (1) Since the special image is displayed when the game with the second specified number is started, the player sees the display of the special image and performs a two-coin game (a game with low performance related to the instruction effect). You can recognize what is being done. (2) In addition, when the replay is won in the second prescribed number of games, the special image is displayed even after the reels are stopped in a predetermined stop mode (even after the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is displayed). is continued, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity due to the special image not being displayed despite winning the replay (even though the next game is also a double-play game). . (3) In addition, if a predetermined condition is met while the special image is being displayed, the special image will not be displayed. By continuing to display the special image, the possibility of other players avoiding the game can be reduced. (4) In addition, while the special image is not displayed, if an operation to start the next game is input, the special image is displayed again, so that the player can play the game with the second specified number. can recognize something.

In addition, the gaming machine of this embodiment is
a plurality of reels 20a-20c;
a setting change means 47 capable of changing setting values;
an input receiving means 40 for setting a prescribed number of gaming values to an input state;
an internal lottery means 42 for performing an internal lottery for a plurality of types of winnings;
A game state control means 49 for controlling transitions between a plurality of game states,
The specified number includes a first specified number (3 sheets) and a second specified number (2 sheets) different from the first specified number,
The multiple types of roles include:
A first bonus (RBB1, RBB2) that can be won in the first specified number;
a second bonus (RBB3, RBB4) that can be won in the second prescribed number,
The probability of winning a role in the internal lottery is set according to the set value,
In the plurality of game states,
an initial state (general middle state) set by initialization;
a first bonus establishment state (RBB internal intermediate state A) that transitions when the first bonus is won in the initial state;
a second bonus establishment state (RBB internal medium state B) that transitions when the second bonus is won in the initial state;
a first bonus state (RBB active state A) to which the first bonus is won and the first bonus is activated;
a second bonus state (RBB in-operation state B) that transitions when the second bonus is won and the second bonus is activated;
The first bonus does not operate in a game in which the second specified number of game values is set to the input state,
The second bonus does not operate in a game in which the first prescribed number of game values is set to the input state,
A game state can be initialized when the set value is changed,
When the set value is changed while the game state is the first bonus establishment state, the game state is initialized,
When the set value is changed while the game state is the second bonus established state, the game state is not initialized.

According to such a configuration, when the game state is erroneously shifted to the first bonus established state in which the predetermined processing related to the instruction function (AT) is not performed, the game state is cleared by changing the setting, but the predetermined processing related to the instruction function is cleared. In the second bonus established state in which the process is executed, it is possible to prevent the game state from being cleared even if the settings are changed. Save time.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.
When the two-ply game is started, the performance control means 100 executes the two-ply game performance and causes the display device 13 to display a special image notifying that the two-ply game is being played. In addition, the effect control means 100, when the replay is won in the two-play game, a predetermined timing (after the last stop button pressing operation) after the third stop operation of the stop button in the two-play game (the second 1 predetermined timing), a state is set in which the special image is not displayed. In addition, the effect control means 100, when winning a small winning combination in a two-ply game, a predetermined timing (after the last stop button pressing operation) after the third stop operation of the stop button in the two-ply game ( second predetermined timing), a state is set in which the special image is not displayed. Note that the pressing operation of the stop button may be rephrased as the pressing operation of the stop button.

Hereinafter, the predetermined timing after the third stop operation of the stop button (after the final stop button depression operation) means the timing at which the release (release) of the third stop operation of the stop button is detected. shall include The same applies to modified examples to be described later.
In addition, the effect control means 100, when winning the replay (small winning combination) in the two-play game, at a predetermined timing after the third stop operation of the stop button in the two-play game, a state in which the special image is not displayed. However, the effect control means 100 wins the replay (small role) in the two-play game, and when the replay (small role) wins (when it is determined that the replay (small role) wins) , the special image may not be displayed at a predetermined timing after the third stop operation of the stop button in the two-play game.

A specific example of Modification 1 will be shown. In the following specific example, the first predetermined timing and the second predetermined timing are timings when it is detected that the third stop operation of the stop button is released (released). However, not limited to this, the first predetermined timing and the second predetermined timing are, for example, the timing when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has passed after the third stop operation of the stop button is performed (demonstration image shift timing). may be Further, the first predetermined timing and the second predetermined timing are not limited to the same timing, and may be different.

A special image shown in FIG. 7(a) is displayed after the double-bet game is started, and when the replay is won in the double-bet game, it is detected that the third stop operation of the stop button is released. The special image will not be displayed at the timing. Further, when a small win is won in the double bet game, the special image is not displayed at the timing when it is detected that the third stop operation of the stop button is released.

This modified example 1 is
a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are arranged;
stop buttons provided corresponding to the plurality of reels;
an internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery to determine the suitability of a role;
Winning judgment means for judging the winning of a winning combination based on the stop mode of the plurality of reels;
Reel control means for rotating the plurality of reels for each game, and using the operation of the stop button as a trigger to stop the reels in a stop mode according to the result of an internal lottery;
an instruction function control means for controlling the execution of an instruction performance for assisting the winning of a predetermined combination;
A gaming machine comprising an effect control means for controlling display of an image on a display device,
In a predetermined game, it is possible to play the game by inserting either the first specified number or the second specified number of game values,
A game performed by inserting the second specified number of game values has lower performance related to the instruction effect than a game performed by inserting the first specified number of game values,
The production control means is
When the game with the second specified number is started, the display device displays a special image notifying that the game is played with the second specified number,
When a replay is won in the second prescribed number of games, the special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing after the last operation of pressing the stop button, and
When a minor winning combination is won in the second specified number of games, the special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing after the last stop button is pressed.

According to this modification 1,
(1) Since the special image is displayed when the game with the second specified number is started, the player sees the display of the special image and performs a two-coin game (a game with low performance related to the instruction effect). You can recognize what is being done. (2) Even if a replay is won in a double-bet game or if a small combination is won, the special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing after the last stop button is pressed. In other words, the special image is not continuously displayed after the third stop operation of the stop button even if the player wins the replay or wins the small winning combination in the double bet game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the other player (the next player) avoids the game due to the special image being continuously displayed after the two-piece game is finished. (3) In addition, even when winning a replay or winning a small winning combination, the same processing is performed in which the special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing, so the processing is simplified. It is possible to improve development efficiency and prevent storage capacity from being squeezed.

In addition, when the special image is shown in FIG. 7B, the special image is displayed when the double-play game is started, and when the replay is won in the double-play game, the third stop button is pressed. At the timing when it is detected that the pressing of the stop operation is released, the special character image as the special image is not displayed, and if a small winning combination is won in the two-play game, the third stop operation of the stop button is pressed. At the timing when it is detected that is released, the special character image as the special image may not be displayed.

Further, when the special image consists only of the special character image, when the double-play game is started, as shown in FIG. A special character image as a special image) may be displayed. In this case, when the special image (special character image) is displayed after the double bet game is started and the replay is won in the double bet game, it is detected that the third stop operation of the stop button is released. When the special image (special character image) is not displayed at the timing, and the small winning combination is won in the two-play game, special at the timing when it is detected that the third stop operation of the stop button is released. The image (special character image) may not be displayed.

(Modification 2)
Next, Modification 2 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.
When the two-ply game is started, the performance control means 100 executes the two-ply game performance and causes the display device 13 to display a special image notifying that the two-ply game is being played. In addition, the effect control means 100, when winning the replay in the two-ply game, the special image at a predetermined timing (first predetermined timing) after the third stop operation of the stop button in the two-ply game. Do not disable the display (that is, continue the display of the special image). In addition, when a small combination is won in a double-playing game, the effect control means 100 performs a special image at a predetermined timing after the third stop operation of the stop button in the double-playing game (referred to as a second predetermined timing). is not displayed.
It should be noted that the effect control means 100 does not cause the special image to be displayed at a predetermined timing after the third stop operation of the stop button in the double-play game when the replay is won in the double-play game. , the effect control means 100, when winning the replay in the double-play game and winning the replay (when it is determined that the replay has been won), the third stop operation of the stop button in the double-play game At a predetermined timing thereafter, the special image may not be displayed.
In addition, the effect control means 100, when winning a small winning combination in the two-ply game, at a predetermined timing after the third stop operation of the stop button in the two-ply game, the special image is not displayed. , the effect control means 100, when winning a small winning combination in the double-playing game and winning a small winning combination (when it is determined that the small winning combination has been won), the stop button in the double-playing game is activated. A state in which the special image is not displayed may be set at a predetermined timing after the 3 stop operation.

A specific example of modification 2 is shown. In the following specific example, let the first predetermined timing and the second predetermined timing be timings when it is detected that the third stop operation of the stop button is released. However, not limited to this, the first predetermined timing and the second predetermined timing are, for example, the timing when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has passed after the third stop operation of the stop button is performed (demonstration image shift timing). may be Further, the first predetermined timing and the second predetermined timing are not limited to the same timing, and may be different.

A special image shown in FIG. 7(a) is displayed after the 2-ply game is started, and when the replay is won in the 2-ply game, it is detected that the third stop operation of the stop button is released. A state in which the special image is not displayed at the right timing (that is, the display of the special image is continued). On the other hand, when a small winning combination is won in the double bet game, the special image is not displayed at the timing when it is detected that the third stop operation of the stop button is released.
In the former (when winning a replay), even if a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has passed since the third stop operation of the stop button was performed while the special image was being displayed, the special Image display continues (does not transition to demo screen).

In the following two specific examples, the first predetermined timing and the second predetermined timing are timings when a predetermined time has passed since the third stop operation of the stop button was performed.

A special image shown in FIG. 7(a) is displayed after a double bet game is started, and if a replay is won in the double bet game, a predetermined time (for example, 1 minutes) have elapsed, the special image will not be displayed (that is, the special image will continue to be displayed and the demo screen will not be displayed). On the other hand, if a small combination is won in the two-piece game, the special image will not be displayed at the timing when the third stop operation of the stop button is performed (for example, 1 minute). screen). This can also be said that, in the case of winning the replay, the demo image will not be displayed even when the timing for displaying the demo image comes in the case of winning the small winning combination.
In the former case (when winning a replay), even when it is detected that the third stop operation of the stop button is released, the special image is not displayed. Also, in the latter case (when winning a small winning combination), the state in which the special image is not displayed does not occur at the timing when it is detected that the third stop operation of the stop button is released.

A special image shown in FIG. 7(b) is displayed after a double bet game is started, and if a replay is won in the double bet game, a predetermined time (for example, 40 seconds), the special image (at least the background image) is not displayed (that is, the special image continues to be displayed and the demo screen is not displayed).
On the other hand, when a small winning combination is won in the two-play game, a state in which the special image (at least the background image) is not displayed at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 40 seconds) has passed since the third stop operation of the stop button is performed. (that is, transition to the demo screen).
In the former (when winning a replay), at the timing when it is detected that the third stop operation of the stop button is released, the special image (background image) is not displayed, but only the special character image is not displayed. state.
Also, in the latter case (when winning a small winning combination), at the timing when it is detected that the third stop operation of the stop button is released, only the special character image may not be displayed. Furthermore, the special image (at least the background image) that is not displayed at the demonstration screen transition timing may be displayed at a predetermined opportunity (for example, inserting medals in the next game).

This modified example 2 is
a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are arranged;
stop buttons provided corresponding to the plurality of reels;
an internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery to determine the suitability of a role;
Winning judgment means for judging the winning of a winning combination based on the stop mode of the plurality of reels;
Reel control means for rotating the plurality of reels for each game, and using the operation of the stop button as a trigger to stop the reels in a stop mode according to the result of an internal lottery;
an instruction function control means for controlling the execution of an instruction performance for assisting the winning of a predetermined combination;
A gaming machine comprising an effect control means for controlling display of an image on a display device,
In a predetermined game, it is possible to play the game by inserting either the first specified number or the second specified number of game values,
A game performed by inserting the second specified number of game values has lower performance related to the instruction effect than a game performed by inserting the first specified number of game values,
The production control means is
When the game with the second specified number is started, the display device displays a special image notifying that the game is played with the second specified number,
When a replay is won in the second specified number of games, the special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing after the last stop button is pressed,
When a minor winning combination is won in the second specified number of games, the special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing after the last stop button is pressed.

According to this modification 2,
(1) Since the special image is displayed when the game with the second specified number is started, the player sees the display of the special image and performs a two-coin game (a game with low performance related to the instruction effect). You can recognize what is being done. (2) When a replay is won in a double bet game, the special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing after the last stop button is pressed (display of the special image is continued). For this reason, when a replay is won in a double bet game, the special image is not displayed even though the replay is won (even though the next game is also a double bet game). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incompatibility. (3) In addition, when a small combination is won in a double-bet game, the special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing after the last stop button is pressed. For this reason, when a player quits the game after winning a small win in a double-bet game, the special image continues to be displayed, so that another player (the next player) may avoid the game. can be reduced.

(Modification 3)
Next, Modification 3 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.
When the two-ply game is started, the performance control means 100 executes the two-ply game performance and causes the display device 13 to display a special image notifying that the two-ply game is being played. In addition, when winning the replay in the two-ply game, the effect control means 100 displays a special image at a predetermined timing (first predetermined timing) after the third stop operation of the stop button in the two-ply game. Do not disable the display (that is, continue the display of the special image). In addition, the effect control means 100 causes the special image to be displayed even after the settlement process is completed (finished) when the settlement process (described later) is executed at the timing after the first predetermined timing.
It should be noted that the effect control means 100 does not cause the special image to be displayed at a predetermined timing after the third stop operation of the stop button in the double-play game when the replay is won in the double-play game. , the effect control means 100, when winning the replay in the two-ply game and winning the replay (when it is determined that the replay is won), the third stop operation of the stop button in the two-ply game At a predetermined timing thereafter, the special image may not be displayed.

Although illustration is omitted, the front door of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is provided with a checkout button (checkout operation unit). This settlement button is formed so as to be operable to be pressed, and is used for execution of settlement processing for paying out medals (game value). In the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, medals set for at least one of bet and credit are paid out. In other words, the objects of settlement based on the operation of the settlement button include not only the medals set in the credit but also the medals set in the bet. When medals are set for both bets and credits, there are, for example, the following two patterns of settlement based on the operation of the settlement button. The first pattern is a settlement pattern in which both the medals set for the bet and the medals set for the credit are paid out at once by operating the settlement button once. In the second pattern, only the medals set in the bet are paid out by the first operation of the settlement button, and credits are set by the second operation of the settlement button after the medals set in the bet are settled. This is a settlement pattern in which the medals that have been paid out are paid out.

In the case of settlement processing, based on the pressing of the settlement button, the blocker moves to the disallowed position, medals are paid out, and after a predetermined time has passed, the blocker moves to the permitted position. good. In addition, after the payment button is pressed (or after the blocker moves to the disallowed position), the output of the voice announcing the completion of payment (payment completion voice) (e.g., "Payment completed") ends. It is good also as settlement processing until between. Furthermore, if a silence period of a fixed time is provided after the output of the settlement completion voice, the settlement process may be performed until the silence period elapses.

When the replay is won in the double-play game, the effect control means 100 performs a special operation at a predetermined timing after the third stop operation is performed in the double-play game (predetermined timing after the last stop button pressing operation). To continue the display of a special image without putting the image in a non-display state. In addition, the effect control means 100, when the settlement process is started at a timing after the predetermined timing (when it is detected that the settlement process has started), starts execution of the effect related to the settlement process, and displays a special image. The display device 13 is caused to display an image (accounting image, accounting screen) for notifying that the accounting process is being executed. Then, the effect control means 100 causes the display device 13 to display the special image when the settlement process is completed (when a signal indicating that the settlement process is completed is received).

A specific example of modification 3 will be shown. Let the first predetermined timing be the timing when it is detected that the third stop operation of the stop button is released (released). A special image (FIG. 7(a)) is displayed after a double bet game is started, and when a replay is won in the double bet game, it is detected that the third stop operation of the stop button is released. The display of the special image is continued without being in a state where the special image is not displayed at the timing. Then, when the settlement process is started, the special image is not displayed, and the settlement image (not shown) is displayed. When the settlement process is completed, the settlement image is not displayed, and the special image is displayed.

Also, let the first predetermined timing be the timing when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has passed since the third stop operation of the stop button was performed. When a special image (FIG. 7(a)) is displayed after a double bet game is started and a replay is won in the double bet game, a predetermined time (for example, 1 Minutes) has passed (the timing at which the demo image starts to be displayed if you win another winning combination (for example, a small winning combination), and the special image continues to be displayed instead of not being displayed. be done. Then, when the settlement process is started, the special image is not displayed, and the settlement image (not shown) is displayed. When the settlement process is completed, the settlement image is not displayed, and the special image is displayed.

In the above two examples, the settlement image is displayed during settlement processing, but it may be as follows. A special image (FIG. 7(a)) is displayed after a double-bet game is started, and when a replay is won in the double-bet game, it is detected that the third stop operation of the stop button is released. The display of the special image is continued without the special image not being displayed at the timing (or the timing at which a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has passed since the third stop operation of the stop button was performed). Then, even after the settlement process is started, the display of the special image is continued without displaying the settlement image, and the special image is displayed even after the settlement process is completed. In this example, while the settlement process is being executed, the settlement image is not displayed, but a predetermined sound (settlement notification voice) is output to notify that the settlement process is being executed. In this way, the game player can recognize that the settlement is being executed by outputting the settlement notification sound while the settlement image is not displayed during the settlement process.

This modification 3 is
a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are arranged;
stop buttons provided corresponding to the plurality of reels;
an internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery to determine the suitability of a role;
Winning judgment means for judging the winning of a winning combination based on the stop mode of the plurality of reels;
Reel control means for rotating the plurality of reels for each game, and using the operation of the stop button as a trigger to stop the reels in a stop mode according to the result of an internal lottery;
an instruction function control means for controlling the execution of an instruction performance for assisting the winning of a predetermined combination;
A gaming machine comprising an effect control means for controlling display of an image on a display device,
In a predetermined game, it is possible to play the game by inserting either the first specified number or the second specified number of game values,
A game performed by inserting the second specified number of game values has lower performance related to the instruction effect than a game performed by inserting the first specified number of game values,
The production control means is
When the game with the second specified number is started, the display device displays a special image notifying that the game is played with the second specified number,
When a replay is won in the second specified number of games, the special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing after the last stop button is pressed,
When the settlement process is executed at a timing after the predetermined timing, the special image is displayed even after the settlement process is completed.

According to this modification 3,
(1) Since the special image is displayed when the game with the second specified number is started, the player sees the display of the special image and performs a two-coin game (a game with low performance related to the instruction effect). You can recognize what is being done. (2) When a replay is won in a double bet game, the special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing after the last stop button is pressed (display of the special image is continued). For this reason, when a replay is won in a double bet game, the special image is not displayed even though the replay is won (even though the next game is also a double bet game). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity. (3) In addition, when the settlement process is executed in a state where the special image is displayed after the double bet game, the special image is displayed even after the completion of the settlement process. Even if the player quits the game when the settlement process is completed, the special image is displayed after the settlement process is completed. It can be recognized that a two-ply game (a game with low performance regarding instruction performance) has been played.

(While pressing the 3rd stop operation)
Here, holding down the third stop operation, that is, the last stop button operation, is referred to as pressing the third stop operation. Next, a description will be given of the processing in the case where power failure occurs while the third stop operation is being pressed in a state where the double-bet game is started and the special image is being displayed.
(α) When winning a replay in a double-bet game.
(α1) The effect control means 100 is in a state in which a double-bet game is started and a special image is being displayed, a power failure occurs while the third stop operation is being pressed, and a power failure occurs while the third stop operation is being pressed. When returning, the normal image is displayed instead of the special image. By displaying the normal image instead of the special image after the recovery from power failure, even if the player quits the game, the possibility that other players will avoid the game due to the continued display of the special image is reduced. can be reduced.
(α2) The effect control means 100 is in a state where a double-bet game is started and a special image is being displayed, a power failure occurs while the third stop operation is being pressed, and a power failure occurs while the third stop operation is being pressed. When it returns, a special image is displayed. Since the special image is displayed again after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the special image not being displayed despite winning the replay.
(α3) The effect control means 100 detects that a power failure occurs while the third stop operation is being pressed in a state in which a double bet game is started and a special image (a special character image in FIG. 8) is being displayed. If the power is restored while the stop operation is being pressed, the special image (special character image) is not displayed. It is possible to reduce the possibility of other players avoiding the game due to the continuous display of the special image (special character image).
(β) When winning a small winning combination in a double-play game.
(β1) The effect control means 100 is in a state in which a double bet game is started and a special image is being displayed, a power failure occurs while pressing the third stop operation, and power failure occurs while the third stop operation is being pressed. When returning, the normal image is displayed instead of the special image. By displaying the normal image instead of the special image after the recovery from power failure, even if the player quits the game, the possibility that other players will avoid the game due to the continued display of the special image is reduced. can be reduced.
(β2) The effect control means 100 detects that a power failure occurs while the third stop operation is being pressed in a state in which a double bet game is started and a special image (a special character image in FIG. 8) is being displayed. If the power is restored while the stop operation is being pressed, the special image (special character image) is not displayed. It is possible to reduce the possibility of other players avoiding the game due to the continuous display of the special image (special character image).

(Second embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the invention will be described. The gaming machine of this embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment. In other words, the number of medals required for one game (specified number) is set to 2 or 3 according to the game state, and the game is played by inserting (betting) 2 or 3 medals. can be executed. The description of the configuration similar to that of the gaming machine of the first embodiment will be omitted or simplified.

2. Description of the Related Art In a slot machine as a game machine, a lottery for a winning combination is performed in accordance with a player's bet of medals (game value) and operation of a start lever, and a plurality of reels with various symbols are rotated. Then, the reels are sequentially stopped according to the result of the lottery and the operation of the stop button by the player, and when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the effective line, which is the line to be paid out, a predetermined number of symbols are displayed. A game profit (game profit) is given to the player, such as payout of medals. In such a slot machine, in order to limit the progress speed of a game by a player, for example, after validating the operation of the stop button in the previous game, at least until the operation of the stop button is validated in the next game. You have to wait for the prescribed wait time.

Further, when the stop button is operated, the operation of the other stop switches is temporarily invalidated based on the stop control of the reel corresponding to the stop button, so the player can validate the operation of the other stop switches. You cannot perform the following operations until For example, if a predetermined time has passed since the timing at which a stop operation was performed on any one of a plurality of reels, and the number of reels that are all-phase-excited is not less than 2, the next reel is stopped. Disallowing techniques are known. If the stop switch corresponding to the other spinning reel cannot be operated until each reel stops, the game time becomes longer. In particular, in order for the player to grasp the winning combination early and to avoid missing the winning combination grasped after the winning combination is grasped, the predetermined symbol of the predetermined reel stops on the activated line. In some cases, the eye-pushing may be performed, and the game time may be prolonged by trying to perform the eye-pushing carefully.

In order to avoid the lengthening of the game time, it is conceivable to determine whether the player has won a prize, notify the game result, or pay out medals before all the reels are stopped. However, if the game results are announced or medals are paid out before the player determines that one game has been completed, the player will feel distrust and discomfort. This embodiment provides a gaming machine capable of wiping out a player's sense of distrust.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment comprises winning type lottery means for performing a winning type lottery based on the operation of a start switch, and rotation of a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged according to the operation of the start switch. Reel control means for stopping and controlling reels corresponding to the operated stop switches in response to the operation of a predetermined stop switch that has been started and activated; determination means for determining a prize when the operation of the specific stop switch is released.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes winning type lottery means for performing a winning type lottery based on the operation of a start switch, and rotation of a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged according to the operation of the start switch. Reel control means for stopping and controlling reels corresponding to the operated stop switches in response to the operation of a predetermined stop switch that has been started and activated; determination execution means for performing a process based on a winning determination when the operation of the specific stop switch that has been performed is released.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment comprises winning type lottery means for performing a winning type lottery based on the operation of a start switch, and rotation of a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged according to the operation of the start switch. Reel control means for stopping and controlling reels corresponding to the operated stop switch in response to the operation of a predetermined stop switch that has been started and activated; and determination means for determining winning when the reels are completely stopped and the operation of the operated specific stop switch is released.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment comprises winning type lottery means for performing a winning type lottery based on the operation of a start switch, and rotation of a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged according to the operation of the start switch. Reel control means for stopping and controlling reels corresponding to the operated stop switch in response to the operation of a predetermined stop switch that has been started and activated; a judgment executing means for executing a process based on a winning judgment when the reels are completely stopped and the operation of the operated specific stop switch is released.

(Mechanical Configuration of Slot Machine 100)
As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, a slot machine 100 as a game machine includes a housing 102 with an open front surface and an upper front door 104 arranged rotatably vertically at one end of the front surface of the housing 102. and a lower front door 106 are provided. A colorless and transparent pattern display window 108 made of a glass plate, a transparent resin plate, or the like is provided at approximately the center of the lower portion of the upper front door 104. At a position corresponding to the pattern display window 108 in the housing 102 , three reels 110 (a left reel 110a, a middle reel 110b, and a right reel 110c) are independently rotatable. As shown in the pattern arrangement of FIG. 11, a plurality of types of symbols are arranged in each area divided equally into 20 on the outer peripheral surfaces of the left reel 110a, the middle reel 110b, and the right reel 110c. , through the symbol display window 108, a total of 9 symbols can be visually recognized for each of the left reel 110a, the middle reel 110b, and the right reel 110c located in the upper, middle, and lower stages.

An operation unit installation table 112 is formed on the upper part of the front lower door 106, and the operation unit installation table 112 includes a medal insertion unit 114, a bet switch (bet button) 116, a start switch (start lever) 118, a stop switch (stop button) 120, production switch (production button) 122, and the like are provided. The medal insertion unit 114 receives insertion of medals as game value through a medal insertion slot 114a. The bet switch 116 inserts (bets) a prescribed number of medals required for one game among the medals electrically stored (hereinafter simply referred to as credits) inside the slot machine 100 .

The start switch 118 is composed of, for example, a lever capable of detecting a tilting operation, and detects a game start operation by the player. The stop switches 120 (stop switch 120a, stop switch 120b, stop switch 120c) are provided corresponding to the left reel 110a, middle reel 110b, and right reel 110c, respectively, and detect a player's stop operation. In addition, when the stop switch 120 can be stopped, the player's first stop operation of any one of the stop switch 120a, the stop switch 120b, and the stop switch 120c is referred to as a first stop operation. After that, stopping either of the two stop switches 120 that have not been stopped is called the second stop operation, and after the second stop, stopping the last remaining stop switch 120 is the third Stop operation. The effect switch 122 is composed of, for example, a press switch and a jog dial switch rotatably arranged around it, and detects a player's press operation or rotation operation.

A liquid crystal display section 124 for displaying various images associated with the performance is provided at approximately the center of the upper portion of the front upper door 104 . In addition, on the upper part and on the left and right of the front upper door 104, there are provided lamps 126 for effect, which are composed of, for example, high-intensity light-emitting diodes (LEDs). Speakers 128 are provided at the left and right positions of the liquid crystal display section 124 on the rear surface of the upper front door 104 and at the left and right positions on the rear surface of the lower front door 106 to produce auditory effects such as sound effects and musical tones.

A main credit display section 130 and a main payout display section 132 are provided on the operating section installation table 112 . A sub-credit display section 134 and a sub-payout display section 136 are provided between the symbol display window 108 and the operation section installation table 112 . The main credit display portion 130 and the sub-credit display portion 134 display the number of credited medals (the number of credits), and the main payout display portion 132 and the sub-payout display portion 136 display the number of payout medals. .

Below the reel 110 in the housing 102, a medal payout device (medal hopper) 142 for paying out medals from the medal outlet 140a is provided. In addition, a receiving tray portion 140 for storing medals dispensed from the medal ejection port 140a is provided at the lower front portion of the lower front door 106. As shown in FIG. A power switch 144 is also provided in the housing 102 . The power switch 144 is operated by an administrator who manages the slot machine 100 and is used to switch between two states, a power-off state and a power-on state.

In the housing 102, a main control board 200, which will be described later, is provided with setting keys and setting change switches (not shown) (collectively referred to as setting value setting means). In the slot machine 100, when a predetermined key (operation key) is inserted into the setting key and turned from the OFF position to the ON position, when the power is turned on via the power switch 144, the setting change mode is entered. , the setting value can be changed (simply referred to as setting change). The set value indicates the degree of advantage of the player (machine ratio) in stages, and is represented, for example, in six stages from 1 to 6. In general, the higher the value of the set value, the more advantageous the game as a whole. It is set to be high (expected acquisition number is high). The set value is incremented by 1 each time the setting change switch is pressed in a state in which the setting can be changed. Then, the setting value is determined, and the setting change mode is terminated by returning the setting key to the original position (OFF position), and the game becomes possible. Note that setting changes are possible only for a certain period of time after the power switch 144 is operated and the power is turned on.

In the slot machine 100, when a game can be started and a specified number of medals are betted, the activated line is activated and the operation of the start switch 118 is activated. Here, bets are made on the basis of the insertion of credited medals through the operation of the bet switch 116, the insertion of medals through the medal insertion unit 114, and the display of the replay combination on the activated line. including any case of automatic input. Also, the activated line is a line for judging the winning of the winning combination, and there is one activated line in this embodiment.

When the player operates the start switch 118, the game is started, the left reel 110a, the middle reel 110b, and the right reel 110c are rotated, and the winning type lottery and the like are executed. After that, according to the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b and 120c, the corresponding left reel 110a, middle reel 110b and right reel 110c are stopped respectively. Then, if a winning combination that can receive medals wins according to the combination of the drawing result of the winning type lottery and the symbols displayed on the activated line, the medals are paid out, and the winning type that can receive the medals is selected. In the case of no winning or winning but no winning, the game ends when the left reel 110a, the middle reel 110b and the right reel 110c all stop.

In the present embodiment, the above-described one game is the insertion of medals through the medal insertion unit 114, the insertion of credited medals through the operation of the bet switch 116, or the display of a replay combination on the activated line. After one of the medals is automatically inserted based on the above, the rotation of the left reel 110a, the middle reel 110b, and the right reel 110c is controlled according to the operation of the start switch 118 by the player, and the winning type lottery is executed. , a left reel 110a, a middle reel 110b, and a right reel 110c corresponding to the operated stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c according to the lottery result of the winning type lottery and the operation of the plurality of stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c by the player. are controlled to be stopped, and when a winning combination that can receive medals is won, the game is played until the medals are paid out. In addition, when the winning type for which medals can be paid out is not won, or when the player wins but does not win, the left reel 110a, the middle reel 110b and the right reel 110c all stop, and one game ends. However, the start of one game may be read as the operation of the start switch 118 by the player instead of the insertion of medals or the winning of a replay combination. Also, the number of times such one game is repeated is the number of games.

(Electrical Configuration of Slot Machine 100)
FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a schematic electrical configuration of the slot machine 100. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, the slot machine 100 includes a main control board 200 (main control section) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control board 202 (sub-control section) that controls the effects according to the progress of the game. A control board is provided that includes. In addition, electrical signal transmission between the main control board 200 and the sub control board 202 is limited to one direction only from the main control board 200 to the sub control board 202 from the viewpoint of fraud prevention.

(Main control board 200)
The main control board 200 has a semiconductor integrated circuit including a main CPU 200a that is a central processing unit, a main ROM 200b that stores programs and the like, a main RAM 200c that functions as a work area, and the like, and controls the entire slot machine 100. . The data in the main RAM 200c is retained without being erased, even when the power is turned off, unless the setting is changed and the RAM is cleared.

In addition, the main control board 200 functions by the main CPU 200a cooperating with the main RAM 200c based on the program stored in the main ROM 200b. 306, determination means 308, payout control means 310, game state control means 312, effect state control means 314, command transmission means 316 and other functional units.

The main control board 200 receives various detection signals from an inserted medal detection section 114b for detecting insertion of medals into the medal slot 114a, a bet switch 116, a start switch 118, and stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c. The main CPU 200a executes various processes based on the received detection signal.

The initialization means 300 executes initialization processing in the main control board 200 . The betting means 302 bets medals to be used for games. Based on the operation of the start switch 118, the winning type lottery means 304 performs a winning type lottery for determining the suitability of the winning combination, more specifically, the suitability of the winning combination including the winning combination, as will be described in detail later.

The reel control means 306 controls the rotation of the left reel 110a, the middle reel 110b and the right reel 110c according to the operation of the start switch 118, and corresponds to the rotating left reel 110a, the middle reel 110b and the right reel 110c. Depending on the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c, the corresponding left reel 110a, middle reel 110b, and right reel 110c are controlled to stop. In addition, the reel control means 306 activates the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c in the previous game in response to the operation of the start switch 118, and then displays the lottery result of the winning type lottery. The time until the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c is validated (invalidated by the completion of the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c in the previous game) is extended beyond the prescribed time, and during that time, the reel 110a , 110b, and 110c are rotated in various manners (freeze effect). In the reel performance, an arbitrary switch that should be enabled is not enabled for a predetermined time, processing that should be executed is suspended for a predetermined time, or a switch signal that should be transmitted or received is transmitted or received for a predetermined time. It can be realized by doing or not.

A reel drive control section 150 is also connected to the main control board 200 . The reel drive control unit 150 drives a stepping motor 152 based on a rotation start signal for the left reel 110a, the middle reel 110b, and the right reel 110c, which is transmitted from the reel control means 306 in response to the operation signal of the start switch 118. do. In addition, the reel drive control unit 150 detects the respective stop signals of the left reel 110a, the middle reel 110b, and the right reel 110c, which are transmitted from the reel control means 306, and the rotation position detection circuit 154 in response to the operation signal of the stop switch 120. Drive of the stepping motor 152 is stopped based on the signal.

The determining means 308 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the active line. Here, the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the active line may simply be called winning. The payout control means 310 pays out medals in the number (amount of value) corresponding to the winning combination based on the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination being displayed on the activated line (winning). A medal payout device 142 is connected to the main control board 200, and the payout control means 310 discharges medals while counting the number of payout medals.

The game state control means 312 refers to the result of the winning type lottery and the determination result of the determination means 308, and shifts the game state to one of a plurality of types of game states. In addition, the effect state control means 314 refers to the result of the winning type lottery, the determination result of the determination means 308, and the transition information of the game state, and shifts the effect state to one of a plurality of types of effect states.

The command transmission means 316 is a game-related command associated with the operation of the betting means 302, the winning type lottery means 304, the reel control means 306, the determination means 308, the payout control means 310, the game state control means 312, the effect state control means 314, and the like. are sequentially determined, and the determined commands are sequentially transmitted to the sub control board 202 .

The main control board 200 is also provided with a random number generator (random number generating means) 200d. The random number generator 200d sequentially increments the count value, loops within a predetermined numerical range, and extracts the count value at a predetermined point in time to obtain a random number. The random number generated by the random number generator 200d of the main control board 200 (hereinafter referred to as the winning type lottery random number) is used for the game profit given to the player, for example, the winning type lottery means 304 determines the winning type. .

(Sub control board 202)
The sub-control board 202, like the main control board 200, has various semiconductor integrated circuits including a sub-CPU 202a that is a central processing unit, a sub-ROM 202b that stores programs and the like, and a sub-RAM 202c that functions as a work area. , based on the command from the main control board 200, particularly controls the performance. The sub-RAM 202c is also connected to a backup power source (not shown) in the same manner as the main RAM 200c, so that data is retained without being erased even when the power is turned off. The sub control board 202 is also provided with a random number generator (random number generating means) 202d, similar to the main control board 200, and the random number generated by the random number generator 202d It is used to determine the mode of production.

Also, in the sub-control board 202, the sub-CPU 202a functions by cooperating with the sub-RAM 202c based on the program stored in the sub-ROM 202b. It has a functional part.

The initialization determination means 330 executes initialization processing in the sub control board 202 . The command receiving means 332 receives commands from other control boards such as the main control board 200 and processes the commands. The effect control means 334 receives the detection signal from the effect switch 122, and determines the effect of the game performed by each device of the liquid crystal display unit 124, the speaker 128, and the effect lamp 126 based on the received command. Specifically, the effect control means 334 controls the image data displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 124, the effect lamp 126, the sub-credit display unit 134, the sub-payout display unit 136, and other illumination equipment for effects. Along with determining the decoration data, the audio data constituting the audio to be output from the speaker 128 is also determined. And the production|presentation control means 334 performs the production|presentation of the determined game. Note that the production includes an auxiliary production (instruction production). In the winning type lottery, when a selected winning type in which a correct combination (specific combination) and an incorrect combination are duplicated, the correct operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c, which is a winning condition for the correct combination, is performed. This is an effect for notifying the operation mode. With such an auxiliary effect, the player can easily display the symbol combination corresponding to the correct combination on the activated line. An effect state in which such an assist effect is executed is called an AT (assist time) effect state. Also, a so-called ART game state may be used in which an AT effect state and an RT (replay time) game state with a high probability of winning a replay combination progress in parallel.

In the following, information managed by a board other than the main control board 200, including the sub control board 202, such as the liquid crystal display section 124, the effect lamp 126, the speaker 128, the sub credit display section 134, and the sub payout display section 136 The means may be called other notification means. On the other hand, the notification means managed by the main control board 200, such as the main credit display section 130 and the main payout display section 132, may be called main notification means (instruction monitor). Also, the main notification means and other notification means capable of executing the auxiliary effect may be collectively referred to as the auxiliary effect execution means. The effect state control means 314 causes the auxiliary effect executing means to execute the auxiliary effect in the AT effect state.

In this embodiment, when the stop switch 120 is operated by the player, if the symbols forming the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination that can win a prize are on the active line, the reel control means 306 Stop control is performed so that the symbol stops on the activated line. Further, when the stop switch 120 is operated, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination that can win a prize are not on the effective line, but are for four symbols in the direction opposite to the rotating direction of the reels 110.例文帳に追加, the reel control means 306 controls the number of symbols away from each other to be the number of sliding frames, and the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination are displayed on the effective line. Stop control is performed so as to stop after maintaining the rotation for the number of sliding frames so as to pull upward. In addition, if there are a plurality of symbols corresponding to winning combinations that can be won in the reel 110, and all of them exist within the pull-in range of the reel 110, any symbol is placed on the effective line according to a predetermined priority. Stop control is performed to stop after maintaining the rotation for the number of sliding frames so as to draw the prioritized symbol onto the activated line. Incidentally, when the stop switch 120 is pressed, if a symbol forming a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination other than a winable winning combination is on the active line, the reel control means 306 controls the symbol to be replaced. A so-called kicking process is also executed in parallel to prevent the ball from stopping on the effective line. In addition, as will be described later, when an operation mode (operation order or operation timing) is set as a winning condition for a winning combination included in the winning type, the reel control means 306 controls the winning combination according to the player's operation mode. The symbol combination corresponding to is controlled to be displayed on the effective line.

When one of the winning areas is won, the internal winning flag corresponding to each winning area is established (turned on), and each reel 110 is controlled to stop according to the state of establishment of this internal winning flag. . At this time, if a winning area containing a small winning combination is won, but the combination of symbols corresponding to these winning combinations cannot be displayed on the active line within the game, an internal The winning flag is turned off. In other words, the right to win a minor winning combination is limited only within the game in which the winning area containing the minor winning combination has been won, and the right cannot be carried over to the next game. On the other hand, when the winning area including the winning combination "RBB" is won, the RBB internal winning flag is established (ON) and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" is displayed on the active line. The RBB internal winning flag is carried over across games until the game is played. In addition, when the internal winning flag corresponding to the winning area including the replay is established, the symbol combination corresponding to one of the replays included in the winning area is always displayed on the active line, and the medal is awarded. The internal winning flag is turned OFF after the necessary processing for playing the next game is performed.

(reel rotation and stop processing)
In the slot machine 100, each reel 110a, 110b, 110c is rotated and stopped through operation of each switch such as the bet switch 116, the start switch 118, the stop switch 120, etc., and the player receives medals according to the result of the stop. can be obtained. Here, the rotation and stop processing of the reels 110a, 110b, 110c in response to the operation of the start switch 118 and the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c will be described in detail.

When the player operates the start switch 118, the reel control means 306 starts rotating the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c (hereinafter, starting the rotation of the reel 110 is referred to as starting rotation). Then, the reel control means 306 causes the rotational speeds of the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c to increase (hereinafter, the state in which the rotational speeds are increasing is referred to as an acceleration state), and reaches a predetermined speed (less than 80 rpm/min). Then, the predetermined speed is maintained (hereinafter, the state in which the speed is maintained and rotated is referred to as a constant speed state). Then, when all the indexes specifying the respective positions of the reels 110a, 110b, 110c are detected, the reel control means 306 validates the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c. The player can determine whether the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is valid or invalid by the color of the backlight emitted from each of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c. For example, if the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c is valid, the backlight of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c emits blue light, and if the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c is invalid, the stop switch The backlights of 120a, 120b, and 120c are made to emit red light. Such emission colors and emission timings will be described in detail later with reference to flowcharts.

However, the reel control means 306 validates the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c not only when the index is detected but also when a predetermined permission condition is satisfied. Permission conditions are described below.

As described above, the bet switch 116, the start switch 118, and the stop switch 120 are exposed to the slot machine 100 for easy operation, and can be touched by the player at any time. However, even if the player operates each switch, if the operation of the switch is not validated, the operation will not be effectively processed. For example, when one game ends, the operation of the bet switch 116 is validated, and when medals are betted, the operation of the start switch 118 is validated, and when the start switch 118 is operated, the reels 110a and 110b. , 110c start rotating and the reels 110a, 110b and 110c can be stopped, the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b and 120c is enabled, and the reels 110a, 110b and 110c are stopped.

Therefore, after operating the start switch 118, the player waits for the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c to be validated, operates the validated stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c, and reels 110a, Stop 110b and 110c. Since the stop switch 120 can be operated at any time, after the operation of the start switch 118 is validated, the player operates (holds) any of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c that have not yet been validated. , the start switch 118 can be operated. However, if the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is not validated, the operation is not effectively processed, only the operation of the start switch 118 is effectively processed, and the reel control means 306 The reels 110a, 110b, and 110c start rotating according to the operation. Then, when all the indices of the reels 110a, 110b and 110c are detected and the timing for validating the operation of the stop switch 120 in one game is reached, the reel control means 306 validates the operation of the stop switch 120a, 120b and 120c. do. However, if the stop switch 120 has already been operated at this timing and the operation has not been canceled (if the ON state is maintained), as soon as the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c is validated, the The operation is effectively accepted, and the reel 110 starts to stop.

Thus, if the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is accepted as soon as the operation is validated, the following problems may arise. That is, the stop positions of the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are determined based on the rotation start positions of the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c. The reels 110a, 110b, and 110c can be stopped at desired positions without any adjustment, so-called spot pressing assistance.

In addition, even if the stop switch 120 is fixed in the operated state (ON state) and is malfunctioning, the stop switch 120a is turned off as soon as the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c is validated. , 120b and 120c are effectively accepted, the game progresses with the stop switches 120a, 120b and 120c malfunctioning.

Furthermore, even if the player accidentally operates the start switch 118 while holding down the stop switch 120 for some reason, the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c can be effectively accepted. The reel 110 corresponding to the erroneously operated stop switch 120 which is different from the stop switch 120 to be operated or the stop switch 120 to be operated is stopped. As a result, for example, when the effect state is a pseudo-bonus effect state (AT effect state), a stop operation different from the correct operation mode may occur, and the original game profit may not be obtained.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the reel control means 306 activates the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c in one game in a state in which the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c are operated (the pressing operation is maintained). When all the indexes of the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are detected, and the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c is not released, the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c is not validated. do. Then, the reel control means 306 detects all indexes of the reels 110a, 110b and 110c while the stop switches 120a, 120b and 120c are operated, and releases the operation of the operated stop switches 120a, 120b and 120c. Then, the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is validated. Therefore, the permission condition described above is that the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c is canceled (not operated).

13 to 15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rotation and stop processing of the reels 110a, 110b, 110c. FIG. 13 shows the operation timing of the stop switch 120 and the reel 110, and FIGS. 14 and 15 show the operation timings. represents an aspect. The arrows in FIGS. 14 and 15 indicate that each reel 110 is rotating, the stop switches 120 whose operation is invalid are indicated by cross hatching, and the stop switches 120 whose operation is valid are indicated by outline. Here, for convenience of explanation, the case where the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c for stopping the reels in the order of the reel 110a, the reel 110b, and the reel 110c are operated in the order of hitting, that is, in the order of hitting in a forward order will be described. Needless to say, it can be applied to any of the batting orders of all (six in this case).

At time (a) in FIG. 13, the player operates (depresses) the stop switch 120a, and as shown in FIG. ), the start switch 118 is operated. When the start switch 118 is operated, the reel control means 306 excites the stepping motors 152 corresponding to the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c in 1-2 phases as shown in FIG. Start rotating each. Then, when the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c pass through the acceleration state and reach a predetermined speed (less than 80 rpm/min) at time (c) after 167 msec, for example, 1-2 phase excitation continue to move to the constant speed state.

Here, after the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c have reached a constant speed state, it is assumed that all the indexes of the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are detected at time (d) in FIG. When all the indexes of the reels 110a, 110b, 110c are detected, the reel control means 306 essentially activates the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c as indicated by the dashed lines. However, at the time point (d), the stop switch 120a is kept pressed (because the permission condition is not satisfied), so the reel control means 306 operates the stop switch 120a as shown in FIG. 14(c). is maintained, the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is not validated. Therefore, the player cannot stop the reels 110a, 110b, 110c through the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c.

At time (e) in FIG. 13, when the player releases the stop switch 120a, the reel control means 306 detects all the indices of the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c, and sets the permission condition. By satisfying the conditions, the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c is validated as shown in FIG. 14(d). Thus, the player can stop the reels 110a, 110b, 110c through the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c. Here, the stop switch 120a is mentioned, and when the stop switch 120a is operated, all the indexes of the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are detected, and when the operation of the operated stop switch 120a is released, the stop switch 120a is operated. Although an example of validating the operation of the switches 120a, 120b, and 120c has been described, it goes without saying that the same processing is performed not only for this case but also for the other stop switches 120b and 120c.

In this way, due to the configuration in which the operation of the stop switch 120 is not validated until the permission condition is satisfied, the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c (120a, 120b, 120c ( Here, the operation of the stop switch 120a) is effectively accepted, and the stop of the reel 110a is not started. Therefore, the player cannot perform so-called eye-pushing assistance. Further, if any one of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c breaks down, the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c cannot be operated effectively. can be avoided. Furthermore, even if the player erroneously operates the stop switch 120 which is different from the stop switch 120 to be operated or the stop switch 120 to be operated, the operation is not accepted, and the game can be properly played. can proceed.

Here, the reel control means 306 detects all the indexes of the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c with the stop switch 120 being operated, and the permission condition (operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c is canceled). ) is satisfied, the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is validated. However, if the end of the acceleration state or the start of the constant speed state can be grasped without detecting the index, for example, by measuring the time required for at least the completion of acceleration from the start of the acceleration state, the acceleration If the end of the state or the start of the constant speed state can be grasped, the end of the acceleration state or the start of the constant speed state can be adopted instead of detecting the index.
Here, the reel control means 306, when the acceleration state of the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c is terminated while the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c are operated, the permission condition (the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c is is canceled) is not satisfied, the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is not validated, and if the permission condition is satisfied, the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is validated. Alternatively, if the reel control means 306 starts the constant speed state of the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c with the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c being operated, the permission condition (the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c is is canceled) is not satisfied, the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is not validated, and if the permission condition is satisfied, the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is validated.

The same process can also be realized by preventing all indexes from being detected when the stop switch 120 is operated. Specifically, when the stop switch 120 is operated, the reel control means 306 does not detect the index, or invalidates the detection of the index even if it detects the index. In this way, regardless of whether the permission condition is satisfied or not, it is possible to avoid validating the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c when the stop switch 120 is operated.

When the player operates the stop switch 120a at time (f) in FIG. , and operations of the stop switches 120b, 120c corresponding to the reels 110b, 110c for which the stop processing has not yet been performed (that is, operations of all the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c) are invalidated. Then, the reel control means 306 determines the symbols existing within the draw-in range at the time of operation as the stop symbols (determines the number of sliding frames), and draws the stopped symbols onto the effective line by the number of sliding frames. keep spinning. Therefore, it takes 0 to 189 msec (predetermined time within 190 msec), including reaction time for operation detection and interrupt processing, to rotate for the number of sliding frames from the operation of the stop switch 120a.

Subsequently, when the reel 110a reaches a stop position where the determined stop symbol can be stopped on the activated line at time (g) in FIG. All phases are excited, and stop processing of the reel 110a is started so that the phases to be excited are not switched (hereinafter, starting the stop processing by all phase excitation is referred to as start of stop). In this way, the rotational speed of the reel 110a is reduced (hereinafter, the state in which the rotational speed is reduced is referred to as a deceleration state), and as shown in FIG. h) to stop (hereinafter, the fact that the reel 110 has stopped due to a decrease in rotation speed as a result of the start of stop is referred to as stop completion), and the stopped state is maintained (hereinafter, the state in which the stop is maintained is stopped state). Such all-phase excitation is continued for 200 msec and then released at time (i). With the release of the all-phase excitation, the reel control means 306 activates the operation of the stop switches 120b, 120c corresponding to the rotating reels 110b, 110c that have not yet been stopped. Note that the rotation state indicating the operation state of the reel 110 is represented by any one of the above-described acceleration state, constant speed state, deceleration state, and stop state.

Subsequently, when the player operates the stop switch 120b at time (j) in FIG. The operation of the stop switch 120c corresponding to the reel 110c that is not set is invalidated. Then, the reel control means 306 determines a symbol existing within the draw-in range at the time of operation as a stop symbol, and maintains the rotation for the number of sliding frames so as to draw the stop symbol onto the effective line.

Subsequently, when the reel 110b reaches a stop position where the determined stop symbol can be stopped on the activated line at time (k) in FIG. Stop processing of the reel 110b is started so that all phases are excited and the phases to be excited are not switched. Thus, the reel 110b is stopped at time (l) in FIG. 13 after about 13 msec from the start of the stopping process, as shown in FIG. 15(b). However, all-phase excitation continues for 200 msec and is released at time (m). With the release of all-phase excitation, the reel control means 306 validates the operation of the stop switch 120c corresponding to the reel 110c for which stop processing has not yet been performed.

Here, as the stop completion condition, it is determined whether or not all phase excitations are released for all the reels 110a, 110b, 110c. If a so-called slide push that can be operated by pressing is not adopted, the first stopped reel 110 and the second stopped reel 110 will always be at the time when the third stop of the stop switch 120 becomes possible. Stop completed. Therefore, as a stop completion condition, instead of determining whether or not all phase excitations are released for all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c, the reel corresponding to the stop switch 120 that has stopped third (finally operated to stop) 110 may be determined whether or not all-phase excitation has been released. Also, here, 200 msec is counted after all-phase excitation is started, and after 200 msec the excitation is released, and along with the release of excitation, the operation of the stop switch 120c corresponding to the reel 110c for which stop processing has not been performed is enabled. It gives an example of conversion. However, as the stop completion condition, instead of determining whether or not all phase excitation has been released for all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c, it is determined whether or not 200 msec has elapsed since all phase excitation, and the stop processing is performed accordingly. The operation of the stop switch 120c corresponding to the reel 110c for which the operation is not performed may be validated. Such replacement of the stop completion condition can also be applied to all the processes described below.

Next, when the player operates the stop switch 120c at time (n) in FIG. 13, the reel control means 306 nullifies the operation of the operated stop switch 120c, similarly to the operation of the stop switch 120b. Then, the reel control means 306 determines a symbol existing within the draw-in range at the time of operation as a stop symbol, and maintains the rotation for the number of sliding frames so as to draw the stop symbol onto the effective line. Subsequently, when the reel 110c reaches a stop position where the determined stop symbol can be stopped on the activated line at time (o) in FIG. Stop processing of the reel 110c is started so that all phases are excited and the phases to be excited are not switched. Thus, the reel 110c stops at time (p) in FIG. 10, approximately 13 msec after the start of the stopping process, as shown in FIG. 15(c). Such all-phase excitation continues for 200 msec and is released at time (q).

Then, when all the reels 110a, 110b, 110c are stopped and a predetermined stop completion condition is satisfied at time (q) in FIG. When the condition that the phase excitation is released and the operation of the stop switch 120 (here, the stop switch 120c) that was operated last (the third stop operation) is released, is displayed on the effective line It is determined which predetermined combination the symbol combination corresponds to (the winning combination).

Subsequently, the effect control means 334 notifies information relating to the symbol combination displayed on the activated line. For example, when the winning type "common bell A" is determined by the winning type lottery and the stop completion condition is satisfied, the symbol combination displayed on the active line indicates the winning combination "small combination 1". 15(d), the effect control means 334 notifies that the winning combination "small combination 1" has been won through the liquid crystal display section 124, as shown in FIG. 15(d). Further, the notification of information related to the symbol combination displayed on the activated line is not limited to notification through the liquid crystal display section 124. Additionally or alternatively, the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is displayed through the reel backlight. An effect corresponding to the combination may be performed, or a payout sound may be output from the speaker 128 in accordance with (in conjunction with) the payout of medals.

In this way, all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are released from all-phase excitation, and the operation of the last operated stop switch 120 (here, stop switch 120c) is released. , executing a determination process, or notifying an image (image corresponding to the symbol "Bell") indicating that the symbol combination displayed on the activated line is the winning combination "small combination 1". can surely recognize the pattern combination without feeling distrust or discomfort. The image displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 124 to indicate that the symbol combination displayed on the activated line is the winning combination "small combination 1" is as described above from the viewpoint of preventing misrecognition of the game result. The image corresponds to the symbol "bell" displayed on the active line.

In addition, the payout control means 310, similarly to the effect control means 334, for example, the winning type "common bell A" is determined by the winning type lottery, and after the stop completion condition is satisfied, it is displayed on the effective line. If the symbol combination indicates the winning combination 'small combination 1', 11 medals corresponding to the winning combination 'small combination 1' are paid out.

In this way, all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are released from all-phase excitation, and the operation of the last operated stop switch 120 (here, stop switch 120c) is released. By paying out the medals, the medals will not be paid out before one game is finished. Therefore, the player will not feel distrust or discomfort.

Moreover, as described above, the determination means 308, the effect control means 334, and the payout control means 310 perform their respective processes in response to the completion of the stop condition being satisfied. Here, the determination means 308 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination determined by the winning type lottery is displayed on the effective line, and the performance control means 334 determines whether or not the symbol combination is displayed on the effective line. Informing of information about the winning combination and paying out the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning combination displayed on the activated line by the payout control means 310 may be collectively referred to as post-stop processing. In addition, the performance control means 334 and the payout control means 310 may collectively be referred to as determination execution means in terms of executing processing based on the winning determination of the determination means 308 .
As the processing based on the winning judgment, automatic insertion processing of medals for the next game based on the fact that the replay combination is displayed on the active line, and the transition to the bonus game state (game state during RBB operation) based on the winning of the bonus combination. transition processing, transition processing of RT game state based on winning of replay combination for transitioning RT game state, transition processing to AT effect state based on display of lottery result of winning type lottery for transition of AT effect state etc. are also included. Therefore, the player can grasp the game result by at least one of the post-stop processing.
Specifically, by operating (depressing) the last stop switch 120 , the reel control means 306 starts stopping the corresponding reel 110 . Since the reels 110 are stopped within 190 msec by all-phase excitation, all of the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are stopped at least 200 msec after the start of stopping by the timer, and the player visually recognizes the game result. do. However, at that time, if the player has not yet released the operation of the stop switch 120 (if the player continues to hold it down), the determination means 308, the effect control means 334, and the payout control means 310 complete the stop. Do not perform post-processing. Here, only the player can grasp the game result through the symbol display window 108 . Then, when the player releases the operation of the stop switch 120, the determination means 308, the effect control means 334, and the payout control means 310 perform post-stop processing for the first time. Originally, if all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c have been stopped, the game result is recognized inside the slot machine 100 based on the result of the winning type lottery and the order and operation timing of the stop operation. be able to. However, before all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are completely stopped, or in a state where the operation of the last stop switch 120 is not released, the player cannot grasp (visually recognize) the game result, or the player cannot Since there is a possibility that the game operation of the game has not been completed, if the post-stop processing is performed under such a situation, the player will feel distrust and discomfort. Here, by setting the stop completion condition that all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are stopped and the operation of all the stop switches 120 is canceled, it is possible to eliminate the player's sense of distrust and discomfort. . Also, other persons who can see the entire slot machine 100 and other persons who can hear the payout sound of the medals can grasp the game result. Therefore, the player can grasp the game result only by himself/herself and feel a sense of superiority before the post-stop processing is executed.

In the above description, as the stop completion condition, all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are completely stopped, and the operation of the operated stop switch 120 is released. Alternatively, the stop completion condition may be that all the reels 110a, 110b and 110c are completely stopped and all the stop switches 120a, 120b and 120c are released.

In this case, the player can perform the following operations. That is, as described above, the player operates (depresses) the last stop switch 120, and by maintaining the depressing state, It is possible to delay the execution of post-stop processing. Further, here, as the stop completion condition, the cancellation of the operation of all the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is included. Therefore, the player presses the other stop switch 120 while maintaining the pressed state of the last stop switch 120, and presses the last stop switch 120 while maintaining the pressed state of the other stop switch 120. Even if the restrained state is released, since the operation of one of the stop switches 120 has not been released before (because the operation of all the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c has not been released), after the completion of the stop No action is taken.
In addition, not only the last stop switch 120 but also the stopped state of the stop switch 120 that is the first stop or the second stop is not executed. For example, if the stop switch 120 is stopped in the first stop or the second stop, the operation of the other stop switches 120 is enabled regardless of whether or not the depressed state is maintained. Here, while maintaining the depressing state of the stop switch 120 that is the first stop or the second stop, another enabled stop switch 120 is operated, and the stop switch 120 that is the first stop or the second stop is released. Assume that the third stop is completed in a state where the At this time, the player holds down the other stop switch 120 while maintaining the first stopped and/or second stopped state of the stop switch 120, and maintains the held state of the other stop switch 120. However, even if the first stop or second stop switch 120 is released from the pressed state, the operation of any of the stop switches 120 has not been released before (all the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c has not been released), the post-stop processing is not executed.
In this way, if any one of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is maintained in the pressed state, the post-stop processing is not executed, and the player can press the stop switches 120a, 120a, 120c to be in the pressed state. By switching between 120b and 120c, the determination means 308, the effect control means 334, and the payout control means 310 can delay the execution of post-stop completion processing.

With such a configuration, it is possible to wipe away the player's sense of distrust and discomfort. In addition, the player still grasps the game result only by himself before the post-stop processing is executed, and while enjoying the operation of switching the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c that are in the pressed state, he feels superior. can be immersed in

Further, here, the payout control means 310 pays out medals after all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are released from all-phase excitation. Therefore, since the excitation timing (all-phase excitation) of the reel 110 and the timing at which the token payout device 142 is driven can be made different, the amount of current allowed for the entire device managed by the main control board 200 cannot be exceeded. Gone. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a power supply with a large current capacity for driving the token payout device 142 while the reel 110 is being excited, and the cost can be reduced.

Also, even if all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are not released from all-phase excitation, the payout of medals may be started before that, depending on the current capacity allowed by the power supply. For example, if the power supply allows the excitation timing of one reel 110 and the timing of driving the medal payout device 142 to overlap, the timing of excitation of the remaining two reels 110 and the timing of driving the medal payout device 142 overlap. Since it is not necessary to do so, payout of medals is started after all-phase excitation is released for the reel 110 corresponding to the stop switch 120 operated second. Similarly, when the power supply allows the excitation timing of a plurality (for example, 2) of reels 110 and the timing at which the medal payout device 142 is driven to overlap, the number obtained by subtracting the number of allowable reels from the total number of reels (for example, 3-2=1) Since the excitation timing of the reel 110 and the timing of driving the token payout device 142 should not overlap, all the reels 110 (for example, the first reel 110 that has stopped completely) are counted by the subtracted number. After the phase excitation is released, the payout of medals is started.

Also, the payout start timing may be switched depending on whether or not the medal payout device 142 needs to be driven. For example, when the medal payout device 142 needs to be driven, payout is started at a predetermined timing after all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are released from all-phase excitation, and the medal payout device 142 is driven. If it is not necessary, for example, if all paid out medals can be credited (not accompanied by actual payout of medals), even if the payout is started at an arbitrary timing after the determination means 308 has determined the game result. good.

Here, the payout control means 310 operates in response to release of all-phase excitation for all reels 110a, 110b, and 110c and release of the last-operated stop switch 120. , Medals were paid out, but after confirming that all the phase excitations were released for all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c, and that the operation of the last operated stop switch 120 was canceled Medals may be paid out at a predetermined timing (for example, after 10 msec).

Also, here, the reel control means 306 energizes the stepping motors 152 corresponding to the respective reels 110a, 110b, 110c in all phases to start the stop processing of the respective reels 110a, 110b, 110c. However, the stop processing is not limited to all-phase excitation, and it is sufficient to perform excitation, and the stop processing may be started by one-phase excitation. When the rotation control is performed by 1-phase excitation or 1-2 phase excitation, when the final stop position is set to a specific 1-phase position, 1-phase excitation is applied to the specific 1-phase. You may make it stop. In addition, when rotation control is performed by 1-phase excitation or 1-2 phase excitation, when the final stop position is the position of a specific 1 phase, the specific 1 phase and the phases before and after that are included. You may make it stop by applying three-phase excitation. When the rotation control is performed by 2-phase excitation or 1-2 phase excitation, when the final stop position is set to a specific 2-phase position, 2-phase excitation is applied to the specific 2 phases. You may make it stop.

Also, here, as the completion of stopping of the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c, the release of all-phase excitation of the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c and the lapse of 200 msec from the start of all-phase excitation will be explained. However, not limited to this case, for example, the result of the winning type lottery is displayed on the active line so that the player can grasp (visually recognize), or the determined stop symbol is on the active line Various states in which it can be assumed that the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c have stopped, such as entering a range of a predetermined number of steps from the number of steps of the stepping motor 152 corresponding to when the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are stopped, can be regarded as the completion of the stop. can.

Also, here, an example in which the reel control means 306 controls the three reels 110a, 110b, and 110c has been described, but the number of reels 110 is not limited to such a case, and even if it is two or less, four reels may be used. or more. Regardless of the number of reels 110, if the stop switch 120 corresponding to the other spinning reel 110 cannot be operated until an arbitrary reel 110 stops, the game time may become longer as follows. There is For example, in order to grasp the winning combination at an early stage, and to avoid missing the winning combination grasped after the winning combination is grasped, the player is arranged so that the predetermined symbol of the predetermined reel stops on the activated line. This is the case where the player makes a careful selection, or the case where a winning combination with a high payout wins and, for example, 11 medals are paid out sequentially. As a result, the game time in one game becomes longer than the wait time (4.1 seconds), and the progress of the game itself may be delayed. Here, after the operation of the stop switch 120 becomes valid, the operation state (operation/non-operation) of the other stop switches 120 and the corresponding reel rotation state (acceleration state, constant speed state, deceleration state, stop state) ), any stop switch 120 can be operated, regardless of the number of reels 110, the game can be played without the game time exceeding the wait time (4.1 seconds). becomes higher (you can play with full weight).

Further, here, the determination means 308 is activated in response to the release of all-phase excitation for all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c and the release of the last-operated stop switch 120. The combination of symbols displayed on the line is determined, and according to the result of the determination, the performance control means 334 notifies information relating to the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line, and the payout control means 310 selects a winning combination. An example of paying out the corresponding number of medals to be paid out has been described. However, regardless of such a case, since the determination means 308 can determine the symbol combination displayed on the active line at the time when the stop switch 120 is operated last time, all the reels 110a, 110b, 110c can be displayed. In response to the release of the excitation and the release of the operation of the last operated stop switch 120, the effect control means 334 notifies information relating to the symbol combination displayed on the activated line. , the payout control means 310 may pay out the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning combination. In this way, the player's sense of distrust and discomfort can be wiped away.

Also, here, the determination means 308, the effect control means 334, and the payout control means 310 release all the phase excitations for all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c, and the operation of the last operated stop switch 120 is released. Although the explanation has been made by giving an example in which the post-stop processing is performed on the condition that the stop completion post-processing is performed on the condition that the operation Even if the operation of the stop switch 120 has not been released, the post-stop processing may be performed. With such a configuration, regardless of the operation time from the start of the operation of the stop switch 120 to the release of the operation by the player, the game result can be notified early.

Specific processing in the main control board 200 and the sub-control board 202 will be described below with reference to flowcharts.

(Main processing of main control board 200)
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the main control board 200. As shown in FIG. Here, first, the outline of one game after initialization will be described along with the main processing of the main control board 200, and then the details of each processing will be described. Further, here, the processing related to the features of this embodiment will be described in detail, and the description of the configuration unrelated to the features of this embodiment will be omitted. Further, although detailed description is omitted, when each process is performed, the switches used in each process (bed switch 116, start switch 118, stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c) are activated at the start of the process. , is invalidated at the end of processing.

(Step S100)
When the power of the slot machine 100 is turned on via the power switch 144 and becomes energized, the initialization means 300 executes initialization processing in preparation for the start of the game. The initialization means 300 generates backup data at any time while the power is on, and holds the backup data in the main RAM 200c. Therefore, even if an unexpected power failure occurs, the backup data held can be used in this initialization process to restore the state before the power failure. For example, even if an unexpected power failure occurs while the reels 110 are rotating, the reels 110 are started again after the recovery operation. Therefore, in the initialization process, basically the main RAM 200c is not initialized (RAM cleared).

(Step S200)
Subsequently, the betting means 302 bets medals through the player's operation of the bet switch 116 or insertion of medals into the medal inserting section 114 . Also, the command transmission means 316 generates an input command indicating that the operation has been performed, and transmits the generated input command to the sub control board 202 .

(Step S300)
Next, the winning type lottery means 304 validates the game start operation for the start switch 118 and shifts to the state of waiting for the operation of the start switch 118 . Here, the winning type lottery means 304 selects the winning type lottery random number updated by the random number generator 200d of the main control board 200 in response to the operation of the start switch 118 by the player, and selects the 1 winning type lottery random number is acquired. Then, the winning type lottery means 304 determines one winning type lottery table corresponding to the currently set gaming state from the winning type lottery table, and the acquired winning type lottery random number is added to the determined winning type lottery table. It is determined which winning area corresponds to the winning area, and the winning type or non-winning of the determined winning area is determined as the result of the lottery. Further, the game state control means 312 shifts the game state from the non-internal game state to the RBB internal game state when the winning combination "RBB" is determined in the winning type lottery.

In addition, after the lottery result is determined according to the operation of the start switch 118, the command transmission means 316 generates a winning type command including the lottery result of the winning type lottery (winning type or not winning) and information on the game state. and transmits the generated winning type command to the sub control board 202 .

(Step S400)
When the start switch 118 is operated, the reel control means 306 drives the stepping motor 152 to rotate the left reel 110a, middle reel 110b and right reel 110c. In this reel rotation process, when a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) elapses from the start of rotation of the left reel 110a, the middle reel 110b, and the right reel 110c in the previous game (wait), the left reel in the game 110a, the middle reel 110b, and the right reel 110c start to rotate, and when the left reel 110a, the middle reel 110b, and the right reel 110c all rotate at a constant speed (steady speed), the process proceeds to step S500.

(Step S500)
Subsequently, the reel control means 306 activates the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c, and when the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c by the player is received, the left reel 110a, the middle reel 110b, and the right reel 110b corresponding to the operation are received. One of the reels 110c is controlled to stop. Further, when any one of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is operated, the command transmission means 316 sends a stop command (first stop command, second A stop command, a third stop command) is generated each time an operation is performed, and the generated stop commands are sequentially transmitted to the sub control board 202 . The reel stop processing S500 will be described in detail later.

(Step S600)
Next, the judging means 308 judges which combination of symbols displayed on the activated line corresponds to a predetermined combination (winning winning combination). Then, if it is in the advantageous section and a small winning combination has been won, the net increase number counter is updated. Further, the game state control means 312 changes the game state from the RBB inside game state to the RBB inside game state if the symbol combination displayed on the activated line corresponds to the winning combination "RBB" in the RBB inside game state. Move to the game state during operation. In addition, the command transmission means 316 generates a winning command including the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination displayed on the activated line and the symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination is displayed on the activated line. The received winning command is transmitted to the sub control board 202 .

(Step S700)
Further, based on the symbol combination displayed on the activated line (the stop state of the reels 110), for example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the minor combination is displayed on the activated line, the payout control means 310 When the payout process of the corresponding medals is executed and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed on the activated line, the process for betting the next game is automatically executed. Further, when the medal payout process is completed, the command transmitting means 316 generates a payout command indicating that the payout process has been completed, and transmits the generated payout command to the sub control board 202 .

(Step S800)
The game state control means 312 shifts the game state from the RBB active game state to the non-internal game state when the predetermined number of medals is paid out in the RBB active game state. In addition, the effect state control means 314 changes the effect state and changes between the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section. In addition, when the game state or the effect state is changed, the command transmission means 316 generates a game transition command including the changed game state or effect state, etc., and transmits the generated game transition command to the sub control board 202. do. As described above, the one game ends when the transition process S800 ends.

Here, when the transition to the pseudo-bonus effect state is determined, the effect state control means 314 causes the reel control means 306 to execute the first reel effect indicating the transition to the above-described pseudo-bonus effect state, and From the next game, the pseudo bonus effect state is started.

One game is executed through a series of processes from step S200 to step S800. Thereafter, steps S200 to S800 are repeated.

(Reel stop processing S500)
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the reel stop processing in step S500. Here, the processing related to the features of this embodiment will be described in detail, and the description of the configuration unrelated to the features of this embodiment will be omitted.

(Step S501)
First, the reel control means 306 initializes temporary switch light emission flags (predetermined flags) for judging whether the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is valid or invalid. Here, the temporary switch light emission flag is composed of a 3-bit bit string, and each bit is associated with one of the three stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c, valid=1 (ON), invalid=0. (OFF). Therefore, the reel control means 306 sets all the bits of the temporary switch light emission flag to 0 as initialization of the temporary switch light emission flag. In this example, valid=1 (ON) and invalid=0 (OFF), but valid=0 (ON) and invalid=1 (OFF).

(Step S502)
Next, the reel control means 306 refers to the temporary switch light emission flags of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c, and updates the switch light emission flags based on the content of the temporary switch light emission flags (the contents of the switch light emission flags are changed to the temporary switch light emission flags). overwrite with the contents of the light emission flag). Here, the switch emission flag is composed of a 3-bit bit string, and each bit is associated with one of the three stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c, valid=1 (ON), invalid=0 ( OFF). The switch light emission flag operates according to the temporary switch light emission flag. Then, the reel control means 306 refers to the updated switch light emission flag in the interrupt processing every 1.49 msec, which operates in parallel, and if the switch light emission flag is 1 through the output port, that is, If the operation of the stop switch 120 is valid, the backlight of the stop switch 120 is illuminated in blue, and if the switch light emission flag is 0, that is, if the operation of the stop switch 120 is invalid, the stop switch The backlight of 120 is made to emit red light. By visually recognizing the backlight of the stop switch 120, the player can determine whether the operation of the stop switch 120 is valid or invalid. Here, the reason why the switch light emission flag is updated with the content of the temporary switch light emission flag is that the temporary switch light emission flag is once set in the interrupt of the relevant reel stop processing S500, and the backlight of the stop switch 120 is changed to light emission in the next interrupt. This is for the purpose of reflecting the change, and also as a countermeasure against the case where the stop switch 120 is kept being operated before the rotation of the reel 110 is started, as described above.

(Step S503)
Subsequently, the reel control means 306 confirms whether or not an error has occurred. For example, the reel control means 306 confirms the abnormal states "discharge abnormality error", "reverse flow error", "insertion abnormality error", and "retention error". Here, the abnormal state "discharge abnormality error" occurs when the passage sensor of the dispensed medal detection unit (not shown) continues for a predetermined time (eg, 6 msec) or more, except for the dispensation of medals. The abnormal state "backflow error" occurs when the medal passing order is incorrect in the two passing sensors of the inserted medal detecting section 114b while the medal insertion is being accepted. The abnormal state "insertion abnormality error" occurs when the passing sensor of the inserted medal detection unit 114b is in the ON state after a predetermined time (for example, 269 msec) has passed since the blocker (not shown) was closed, or when the insertion of medals is accepted. This occurs when the difference between the number of medals passed in the correct order by the two passing sensors of the inserted medal detection unit 114b and the number of medals passing the R shoot sensor (not shown) exceeds a certain level. The abnormal state "retention error" occurs when the passing sensor of the inserted medal detection unit 114b has been in the ON state for a predetermined period of time (eg, 132 msec) or the insertion detection sensor of the medal slot 114a has been in the ON state for a predetermined period of time (eg, 533 msec). ) occurs when it continues for more than

(Step S504)
Next, the reel control means 306 refers to the index flags and obtains the indices of the spinning reels 110a, 110b and 110c. Note that the index flag is set only after the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c have reached the constant rotation speed. It also indicates that the speed has been reached.

(Step S505)
As a result of step S504, the reel control means 306 shifts the process to step S506 if indexes are detected for all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c, and if there are reels 110 whose indexes are not detected, step S501. Repeat the process from

(Step S506)
Subsequently, the reel control means 306 refers to the stopped reel information, and specifies the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c for which stop processing has already been completed or started in accordance with the operation of the stop switch 120 by the player.

(Step S507)
Next, the reel control means 306 identifies the spinning reels 110a, 110b, and 110c that are not stopped from the result of step S506, and sets the spinning flag. Here, the spinning drum flag is composed of a 3-bit bit string, each bit corresponding to one of the three reels 110a, 110b, 110c, constant speed state=1, acceleration state, deceleration state. It is represented by state or stop state=0. The reel control means 306 also specifies the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c corresponding to the rotating reels 110a, 110b, 110c, that is, the operable stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c.

(Step S508)
Subsequently, the reel control means 306 sets the temporary switch light emission flags corresponding to the operable stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c identified in step S507 to 1 (ON).

(Step S509)
Next, the reel control means 306 refers to a predetermined input port (for example, port number "0") and acquires the current state value of the input port. The value of such an input port functions as an operation flag. Here, the operation flag is composed of a 3-bit bit string, and each bit is associated with one of the three stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c. 0).

(Step S510)
Subsequently, the reel control means 306 computes the AND of the spinning drum flag and the operation flag. Here, if the reel is rotating and the stop switch 120 corresponding to the reel is operated, that is, if the operated stop switch 120 corresponds to the effectively rotating reel 110, The logical product is 1.

(Step S511)
As a result of step S510, if there is even one bit whose AND is 1, that is, if the reel 110 is rotating and the stop switch 120 corresponding to the reel 110 is operated, step S512 , and if there is no bit whose logical product is 1, the processing from step S502 is repeated.

(Step S512)
Next, the reel control means 306 computes the AND of the switch light emission flag and the operation flag. Here, if the stop switch 120 is valid and the stop switch 120 is operated, the logical product is 1.

(Step S513)
As a result of step S512, if there is only one bit whose AND is 1, that is, if the stop switch 120 is valid and only one stop switch 120 is being operated, step S514 , and if there is no bit with a logical product of 1 or there are two or more bits with a logical product of 1, the process from step S501 is repeated.

Here, the reason why the step S513 is provided in addition to the step S511 is to validate the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c only when the permission conditions are satisfied, as described above. That is, if step S513 is not provided and the state in which the stop switch 120 is being operated is maintained before the reel 110 starts rotating, as soon as the index is detected (YES in S505), This is because the AND of the rotating drum flag and the operation flag becomes 1 (YES in S511), and the stop processing is immediately started.

Here, by providing step S513, the switch light emission flag does not become 1, so immediate start of stop processing can be avoided. Specifically, if the stop switch 120 is operated before the start switch 118 is operated, the operation flag becomes 1, and whether it is before or after the rotation of the reel 110 is started, all the reels If indexes are detected for 110a, 110b, and 110c, the AND of the spinning flag and the operation flag becomes 1 in step S510 (YES in S511).
However, if the stop switch 120 is operated before the rotation of the reel 110 is started, although the temporary switch light emission flag is set to 1, the NO path in step S513 is not passed and the NO path in step S511 is not passed. is repeated, the temporary switch light emission flag is reset to 0 (OFF) in step S501, and the switch light emission flag never becomes 1 (ON). Then, in step S513, the AND of the switch light emission flag and the operation flag will not become 1, and the stop processing will not be started immediately.

On the other hand, if indexes are detected for all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c while the stop switch 120 is not operated, the logical product of the spinning drum flag and the operation flag becomes 0 in step S510 (NO in S511). ), the process from step S502 is repeated without going through step S501. Then, the temporary switch light emission flag of 1 is updated to the switch light emission flag in step S502 without being reset in step S501. Therefore, the backlight of stop switch 120 emits blue light in step S502. After that, when the stop switch 120 is operated, the logical product of the rotating drum flag and the operation flag becomes 1 in step S510, and the logical product of the switch light emission flag and the operation flag becomes 1 in step S512 (S513). YES), the shutdown process is initiated appropriately. In this way, even if the stop switch 120 is maintained to be operated before the rotation of the reels 110 is started, stop processing is not performed, and the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are stopped after the indices are detected for all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c. If the switch 120 is operated, it becomes possible to appropriately perform the stop processing.

Looking at the above configuration from another point of view, it is as follows. First, at the timing of step S508 when the indices of all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are detected, the temporary switch light emission flag (predetermined flag) is turned ON. At this time, if the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c is not released, NO will be returned in step S511, and the temporary switch light emission flag will be reset to 0 in step S501 through NO in step S513. Since the switch light emission flag is updated in step S502, the switch light emission flag never becomes 1 while the stop switch 120 is being operated. After all, step S501→step S502→step S508→step S513 are repeated, and the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is not validated.

On the other hand, when the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c is released, the following operations are performed. That is, in step S508, the temporary switch light emission flags corresponding to the operable stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c are set to 1 (ON). If the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are rotating but the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c are not operated even once, the process proceeds to step S502 through NO in step S511. Since the switch light emission flag can be updated with the provisional switch light emission flag of 1 without performing the process of S501, the state where the switch light emission flag is 1 (ON) can be created appropriately. Therefore, the operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c can be validated through the route of step S508→step S511→step S502.

Also, here, it is assumed that there is only one bit whose logical product is 1, and if there are two or more bits, that is, two or more of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c are simultaneously operated. If so, the process from step S501 is repeated without performing the subsequent stop process. In this way, when a plurality of stop switches 120 are operated at the same time, the reel 110 corresponding to the stop switch 120 is not stopped at the same time, and if there is no difference of at least one interruption time (1.49 msec), it is effective operation will not be accepted. Here, by simultaneously stopping a plurality of reels 110, it is possible to avoid an event in which, for example, the process is not completed within the interrupt time and the interrupt process that should be executed is skipped.

Here, if any two or more of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c are simultaneously operated, the processing from step S501 is repeated without performing subsequent stop processing, and any operation is invalidated. made it However, not limited to such a case, a plurality of simultaneously operated stop switches 120 may be stopped according to a predetermined rule. As a predetermined rule, for example, in the order of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c, the reel 110 corresponding to the stop switch 120 on the left side is preferentially stopped, or a so-called AT (assist time), which will be described later. , it is conceivable to preferentially stop the reel 110 corresponding to the stop switch 120 operated in the order in which it should be operated.

(Step S514)
Subsequently, the reel control means 306 determines the number of sliding frames of the reel 110 as a stop process for the reel 110 corresponding to the bit whose logical product is 1.

(Step S515)
Next, the reel control means 306 acquires the stop symbol number, which is the symbol number of the symbol to be stopped among the symbols of the 20 frames, and stores it in a predetermined storage area.

(Step S516)
Subsequently, the reel control means 306 sets the stop request flag to 1. The stop request flag is a flag for requesting the stop processing of the target reel 110 to the programs that operate in parallel. By setting the stop request flag to 1, the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number is enabled. It is possible to stop on the line. The stop request flag and the above stop symbol number are read out by a program that operates in parallel, and stop processing is performed. When the stop processing is completed, the program resets the stop request flag to 0 (OFF).

(Step S517)
Next, the reel control means 306 sets the temporary switch light emission flag corresponding to the stop switch 120 that has undergone the stop processing to 0 (OFF), and updates the switch light emission flag to 0 (OFF) according to the contents of the temporary switch light emission flag.

(Step S518)
Subsequently, the reel control means 306 refers to the switch light emission flags of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c, and causes the backlight of the stop switch 120 whose bit is 0 in step S517 to emit red light.

(Step S519)
Next, the reel control means 306 determines whether or not all-phase excitation of the reel 110 corresponding to the operated stop switch 120 is open. As a result, if all-phase excitation is released, the process proceeds to step S520, and if all-phase excitation is not released, step S519 is repeated. Thus, here, the reel control means 306 disables the operation of all the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c in accordance with the operation of the stop switch 120, and all of the reels 110 corresponding to the operated stop switch 120. Do not enable operation of the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c until the phase energization is released. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a difference between the pressing order of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c and the stopping order of the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c.

(Step S520)
Subsequently, the reel control means 306 determines whether or not the stop processing (steps S514 to S519) of all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c has been completed. As a result, if the stopping process has been completed, the process proceeds to step S521, and if the stopping process has not been completed, the process from step S501 is repeated. Here, if there is a reel 110 that has not been stopped yet, the processing is shifted to step S501 so that the stop processing of the other reels 110 can be immediately executed, thereby shortening the playing time.

(Step S521)
Next, reel control means 306 determines whether or not all phase excitations of all reels 110a, 110b, 110c are open. As a result, if all-phase excitation is released, the process proceeds to step S522, and if all-phase excitation is not released, step S521 is repeated.

(Step S522)
Subsequently, the reel control means 306 confirms whether or not an error has occurred. For example, the reel control means 306 confirms the abnormal states "discharge abnormality error", "reverse flow error", "insertion abnormality error", and "retention error".

(Step S523)
Next, reel control means 306 refers to a predetermined input port (for example, port number "0") and determines whether or not the current state values of the input ports are all zero. As a result, if all are 0, the reel stop processing S500 is terminated, and if any of them is 1, that is, if the stop switch 120 operated by the player has not been released, the processing of step S522 is repeated, wait for release. In this way, it is possible to wait until the stop switch 120 is released before starting the determination process S600.

Then, after the reel stop processing S500 is completed, the determination processing S600 is performed, and then the payout control means 310 pays out the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning combination. Further, when the determination process S600 is performed, a command indicating the result of the winning determination is transmitted to the sub-control board 202, and the effect control means 334 sends the information related to the symbol combination displayed on the activated line to the liquid crystal display section 124. , or through the reel backlight. In addition, the effect control means 334 may output a payout sound from the speaker 128 in accordance with (in conjunction with) the payout of medals by the payout control means 310 .

In this way, the stop completion post-processing is performed in response to release of all-phase excitation for all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c and release of the operation of the last operated stop switch 120. Therefore, the player can surely recognize the symbol combination without feeling distrust or discomfort.

Also, here, the payout of medals is performed after all phase excitations are released for all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c. Therefore, since the excitation timing (all-phase excitation) of the reels 110a, 110b, 110c and the timing at which the token payout device 142 is driven can be made different, the amount of current allowed for the entire device managed by the main control board 200 can be changed. will not exceed. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a power supply with a large current capacity for driving the token payout device 142 while the reel 110 is being excited, and the cost can be reduced.

Also, here, the player pays out medals by canceling the operation of the stop switch 120 . Such processing can eliminate the player's sense of distrust and discomfort. In addition, other persons who can see the entire slot machine 100 and other persons who can hear the payout sound can grasp the game result. Therefore, the player can grasp the game result by himself/herself before the process is executed, and can enjoy a sense of superiority.

Although the preferred embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the accompanying drawings, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to such embodiments. It is obvious that a person skilled in the art can conceive of various modifications or modifications within the scope of the claims, and it should be understood that these also belong to the technical scope of the present invention. be done.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the reel control means 306 activates the operation of the other stop switch 120 only after all-phase excitation of the reel 110 corresponding to the operated stop switch 120 is released. mentioned and explained. However, the reel control means 306 may enable the operation of other stop switches 120 after all-phase excitation of the reel 110 corresponding to the operated stop switch 120 is started. In this case, it can be dealt with by setting all-phase excitation start as the determination target in steps S519 and S521 in FIG. When paying out medals from the medal payout device 142 or when the reels 110a, 110b, 110c of the next game start rotating (starting the acceleration state), waiting for the excitation release of all the reels 110a, 110b, 110c (judgment) processing , step S521 in FIG. 14 can be omitted.

Also, here, an example will be given in which reel control means 306 activates the operation of another stop switch 120 only after all-phase excitation of the reel 110 corresponding to the operated stop switch 120 is released. bottom. However, not limited to such a case, the operation of another stop switch 120 may be validated before the reel 110 corresponding to the operated stop switch 120 stops. For example, operation of any stop switch (eg, stop switch 120a) may not affect the enablement or disablement of other stop switches (eg, stop switches 120b, 120c). That is, regardless of whether another stop switch 120 has already been operated (whether another reel is rotating or stopped), and without waiting for the start of stop or completion of stop, it is still operated. All the stop switches 120 that are not in the state of being operable are maintained in a valid state, and the operation of the stop switches 120 is permitted. Then, the player can continuously operate the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c (so-called slide push). In this case, the reel control means 306 does not need to wait for all-phase excitation of the reel 110 corresponding to the operated stop switch 120 to be released. . Moreover, not only step S519 in FIG. 17 but also step S521 can be omitted. In this case, as described above, when the medals are paid out from the medal payout device 142 or when the reels 110a, 110b, 110c of the next game start rotating, the excitation release of all the reels 110a, 110b, 110c is waited. is preferable.

Therefore, if all the indexes specifying the positions of the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are detected, regardless of whether the stop switch 120a has been operated or whether the rotation state of the reel 110a is the constant speed state. First, since the operation of the stop switches 120b and 120c is enabled, the player can operate the stop switches 120b and 120c to stop the reels 110b and 110c.

In this case, the following events may occur. For example, at the timing when the stop switch 120 is operated, the pattern existing within the draw-in range is determined as the stop pattern, and the rotation is maintained for the number of sliding frames so as to draw the stop pattern onto the effective line. Therefore, when the number of sliding frames is different, the time from the operation of the stop switch 120 to the start of the stop processing of the reel 110 is 0 to 189 msec (predetermined time within 190 msec). 110b and 110c are different. For example, the player operates the start switch 118, the indexes of all the reels 110a, 110b, 110c are detected, and the player pushes the stop switches 120a, 120b, 120c forward as shown in FIG. Suppose you operate in batting order. Then, if the number of sliding symbols is the same, the reel 110a→reel 110b→reel 110c is stopped and completed in this order. For example, the reel 110a may be stopped first, the reel 110c with a smaller number of sliding symbols may be stopped next, and the reel 110b with a larger number of sliding symbols may be stopped after the reel 110c. Thus, here, the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are not necessarily stopped and completed in the same order as the operation order of the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c. Therefore, the stop completion condition in the slide push is that all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are released from all-phase excitation, and all-phase excitation is applied to the reel 110 corresponding to the third stopped (finally stopped) stop switch 120. is released, and the last operated stop switch 120 is released. Then, the determination means 308, the effect control means 334, and the payout control means 310 execute post-stop completion processing when the stop completion condition is satisfied.

Further, as a stop completion condition in the slide push, it is possible to omit the determination of whether or not all-phase excitation is released for the third stopped reel 110 . Further, as described above, as the stop completion condition, instead of determining whether or not all phase excitation of all the reels 110a, 110b, 110c and the third stopped reel 110 has been released, whether or not 200 msec has elapsed since all phase excitation is determined. It may be determined whether In this case, it is possible to cope with this by setting the timing of the timer as the determination target in steps S519 and S521 in FIG. Further, as the stop completion condition, it is determined whether or not all phase excitation is released for all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c while omitting the determination whether or not all phase excitation is released for the third stopped reel 110. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not 200 msec has elapsed since all-phase excitation.

15(d), when all the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c are stopped, the symbol combination displayed on the activated line is the winning combination "small combination 1". If so, the effect control means 334 has explained the result of the game through the liquid crystal display unit 124, that is, the fact that the winning combination "small combination 1" has been won. A device other than the liquid crystal display unit 124 can also be used. For example, the medal payout device 142 as a result informing means discharges the medals corresponding to the winning combination in response to winning of the winning combination. Information related to the combination is notified. Further, the main payout display unit 132 and the sub payout display unit 136, which serve as result notification means, display the number of medals to be paid out as the result of the game, thereby notifying information regarding the symbol combination displayed on the activated line. . In addition, a reel backlight (not shown) as a result notification means illuminates (lights up, blinks, turns off, lights up, blinks, lights out, or lights up in a predetermined pattern) the reels 110a, 110b, and 110c corresponding to the symbol display window 108 as a result of the game. By flashing, information relating to the symbol combination displayed on the active line is reported. In addition, the speaker 128 as a result notification means outputs winning sounds (simple sound effects, sounds corresponding to the winning combination, etc.) as a result of the game, so that the symbol combination displayed on the activated line is displayed. inform information. In addition, the effect lamp 126 as a result notification means emits light (simple light emission, light emission in a color corresponding to the winning combination, and blinking pattern corresponding to the winning combination) as a result of the game. etc.), information relating to the symbol combination displayed on the activated line is notified.

Also, here, as the stop completion condition, the release of the specific stop switch 120 has been described, but the specific stop switch 120 is not limited to the last operated (third stop) stop switch 120, and all , or, as described above, it is not the stop switch 120 that was operated last, but at the time the stop switch 120 that was operated last is released, it maintains the pressed state, and the stop switch 120 that was operated last is maintained. Also included is the stop switch 120 that was released after the stop switch 120 that was released.

Further, here, an example is given in which the information related to the symbol combination displayed on the activated line is notified as the result of the game after all the reels have stopped. However, the information related to the symbol combination displayed on the active line is not limited to the symbol combination corresponding to the winning hand, but also the symbol combination in the case of missing the winning hand, and the non-winning symbol combination is also included.

In addition, here, when the stop switch 120 is operated by the player, the pattern existing within the pull-in range is determined as the stop pattern, and the rotation is maintained for the number of sliding frames so as to simply draw the stop pattern onto the effective line. Although explained with an example, the effect control means 334 may execute an arbitrary effect while the rotation for the number of sliding frames is maintained. However, as described above, the number of sliding symbols changes according to the timing at which the stop switch 120 is operated by the player. Therefore, the effect control means 334 changes the effect according to the number of sliding frames, for example, performs a relatively long effect when the number of sliding frames is large, and performs a relatively short effect when the number of sliding frames is small. You may let Also, depending on the number of sliding frames, the timing of effecting may be changed. For example, it is assumed that the effect control means 334 planned a predetermined effect at the time of the first operation of the stop switch 120 (at the time of the first stop). However, the number of sliding frames of the stop switch 120 is small, and the scheduled time for the performance cannot be sufficiently secured, or the time is short, so even if the performance is executed, the details of the performance cannot be sufficiently communicated to the player. If it is not possible, such an effect may be performed when another stop switch 120 is operated, for example, when the last stop switch 120 is operated (during the third stop). In this way, it is possible to secure the time for the performance and sufficiently convey the content of the performance to the player.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 200 and the sub control board 202 are arranged so as to share the function part for progressing the game, but the function part of the main control board 200 is transferred to the sub control board 202. Alternatively, the functional units of the sub-control board 202 may be arranged on the main control board 200, or all the functional units may be collectively arranged on one control board.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, only one type of AT effect state is provided. good too.

Further, each process performed by the main control board 200 and the sub control board 202 described above does not necessarily have to be processed in time series according to the order described as a flowchart, and may include parallel or subroutine processing.

Further, each process performed by the main control board 200 and the sub control board 202 described above does not necessarily have to be processed in time series according to the order described as the flowchart, and may include parallel or subroutine processing.

In this embodiment, the effect control means 100 is configured by the effect main control means (not shown) provided in the main control board 200 and the effect control means 334 (effect sub-control means) provided in the sub control board 202. . The production main control means issues an instruction to the production sub-control means 334 based on the game state, the production state, and the like. In addition, the effect sub-control means 334 updates the effect data stored in the sub-side storage means based on the information on the game state and the effect state transmitted from the effect main control means, or the information on whether or not to perform the instruction effect. are used to control devices for performance. The control performed by the performance main control means may be performed by the performance sub-control means 334, and the control performed by the performance sub-control means 334 may be performed by the performance main control means. Further, the control performed by the effect control means 100 may be performed by the instruction function control means 51 (see the first embodiment), and the control performed by the instruction function control means 51 may be performed by the effect control means 100. .

Next, a description will be given of a case where the above-described so-called slide push is adopted in the gaming machine capable of playing the two-ply game and the three-ply game described in the first embodiment. In the slide push, regardless of whether another stop switch (stop button) has already been operated (whether other reels are rotating or stopped), the operation of the stop switch that has not been operated is valid. state is maintained. Here, consider a case where the player operates the stop switches 120a, 120b, and 120c in batting order 1 (so-called forward pressing operation). If the numbers of reels to slide are different, the reels 110a, 110b and 110c do not necessarily stop in the same order as the operation order of the stop switches 120a, 120b and 120c (hitting order 1). For example, the reel 110a stops first, then the reel 110c with a smaller number of sliding frames than the reel 110b (for example, one frame) stops, and then the reel 110c with a larger number of sliding frames than the reel 110c (for example, 4 It can happen that the reel 110b (which is the piece) stops after the reel 110c.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the double bet game is started, the effect control means 100 executes the double bet game effect, and displays a special image on the display device 13 notifying that the two bet game is being played. Let As a result, the player or the like can see the display of the special image and understand that a double-play game (a game with low performance related to instruction effects) is being played. At this time, if it is assumed that the special image is not displayed when the last stop switch 120c is pressed and released, the rotation of the reel stops when the slide push is adopted. An event may occur in which the special image is no longer displayed (although there are reels still spinning). In this case, the special image is not displayed before the player determines that one game has been completed, and the player may feel uncomfortable or distrustful.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control means 100 causes the special image displayed at the start of the double-bet game not to be displayed when a predetermined condition is established. The predetermined conditions are (1) detection of the release of the third stop operation of the stop button (the stop button that was operated last) and (2) all reels (reels 110a, 110b, 110c). stoppage of rotation is detected. The predetermined conditions include at least requirements (1) and (2), and may include other requirements.

The gaming machine of this embodiment is
a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are arranged;
stop buttons provided corresponding to the plurality of reels;
an internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery to determine the suitability of a role;
Winning judgment means for judging the winning of a winning combination based on the stop mode of the plurality of reels;
Reel control means for rotating the plurality of reels for each game, and using the operation of the stop button as a trigger to stop the reels in a stop mode according to the result of an internal lottery;
an instruction function control means for controlling the execution of an instruction performance for assisting the winning of a predetermined combination;
A gaming machine comprising an effect control means for controlling display of an image on a display device,
In a predetermined game, it is possible to play the game by inserting either the first specified number or the second specified number of game values,
A game performed by inserting the second specified number of game values has lower performance related to the instruction effect than a game performed by inserting the first specified number of game values,
The production control means is
When the game with the second specified number is started, the special image is displayed on the display device to notify that the game is played with the second specified number, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special image is displayed. and
The predetermined condition is that the last-operated stop button has been released and the rotation of all the plurality of reels has stopped.

According to the present embodiment, even if so-called slide push is adopted, the special image notifying that it is a double bet game is not displayed before the rotation of all the reels is stopped. , does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful because the special image is not displayed before it is determined that one game has ended. Furthermore, according to this configuration, the player can delay the establishment of the predetermined condition by continuing to press the last stop switch 120c. That is, it is possible to delay the timing when the special image is not displayed. As a result, the player can enjoy the special image by continuing to press the last stop switch. Then, the display can be switched by releasing the depression of the stop switch at the desired timing.

(Third Embodiment)
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a case where the present invention is applied to a slot machine, which is one type of gaming machine, will be described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to slot machines and can be applied to other gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines. may be Further, in the following explanation, basically, when the player is in front of the slot machine, "front" means "front" for the player side, "back" for the slot machine side, and "upper and lower". means that the top side of the slot machine is "up" and the bottom side is "bottom", and "left and right" means that the left side of the player playing the slot machine is "left" and the right side is "right". do.

First, a schematic configuration of a slot machine M to which the invention is applied will be described.
18 is a perspective view showing the slot machine M. FIG.
The slot machine M comprises a housing 1, which comprises a bottom plate, left and right side plates, a top plate and a back plate, and has a front opening opening to the front side of the housing 1. formed into a shape. In addition, on the upper surface of the bottom plate, there is a power supply unit with a built-in power supply for supplying power to each part, and a hopper device 150 ( 19), etc. are provided.

A front door 3 is provided on the front of the housing 1 to openably close the front opening of the housing 1. The front door 3 openably closes the upper portion of the opening. A door 30 and a lower door 40 closing the lower part of the opening in an openable/closable manner are provided.
A replacement unit (not shown) is detachably provided in the housing 1 . This exchange unit includes a frame, which is a metal frame assembled in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, a reel unit supported by the frame, and a board unit fixed to the frame.

The reel unit includes three stepping motors provided on a frame and three rotating reels 100a, 100b, 100c (see FIG. 19; not shown in FIG. 1) fixed to the output shafts of the respective stepping motors. ) and Further, the substrate unit is obtained by housing a substrate having electronic parts such as CPU, ROM, RAM, and I/O in a substrate case. The board unit functions as a game control device for controlling the game of the slot machine M.

As shown in FIG. 18, a display window 31 is provided at the bottom of the upper door 30. As shown in FIG. The display window 31 is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the upper side is directed toward the rear side, and the three rotating reels are provided in a row behind the display window 31 . A plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface of each rotating reel, and three symbols per reel are displayed through the display window 31 when the rotating reel stops. In the slot machine M, a total of five pay-per-win lines consisting of three horizontal lines and two diagonal lines are set.
Then, when the three rotating reels are stopped, it is displayed whether or not a winning combination has been won by a combination of the stopped symbols on the pay-per-win line.

A display window 32 larger than the display window 31 is provided substantially vertically on the top of the upper door 30 . This display window 32 is provided for viewing the display surface of the image display device provided on the upper door 30 . The image display device has a liquid crystal display panel, and the display surface of the image display device displays an image for presentation in the game machine. Speakers 14 for outputting various production sounds (music, sound effects, voices, etc.) are provided on both left and right sides of the upper door 30 positioned above the display window 32 .

In addition, in the upper central portion of the display window 32 of the upper door 30, a horizontally long top lens 33 is provided as a display portion for showing the display of the logo sheet to the player.
Between the display window 32 and the display window 31, laterally elongated illumination devices 34, 35, 34 are provided adjacent to each other on the left and right sides for performing notification and effects.

In addition, on both left and right sides of the display window 31 are provided production panels 61 for performing notification and production, and production buttons 62 are provided on the right production panel 61 . The effect button 62 is pressed by the player, and when pressed, it changes the mode of the effect image displayed on the image display device, which can be seen through the display window 32, for example, to encourage the player to participate in the game. This is intended to raise awareness of participation as well as heighten interest. For example, an effect image to be displayed on the image display device in conjunction with the operation of the effect button 62 can be selected. Note that the arrangement of the effect button 62 is not limited to this, and may be provided at a position where the player can press it.
In addition, lighting devices 37 are provided on both the left and right sides of the upper door 30 for notification and presentation.

Further, the upper door 30 is rotatably connected to the replacement unit provided in the housing 1 via a hinge so as to open and close the upper opening of the housing 1 . Further, the lower door 40 is rotatably connected to the housing 1 via a hinge so as to open and close the lower opening of the housing 1 .

Note that this slot machine M has a structure of a separate housing type, and when the model is changed in amusement arcades, the replacement unit to which the upper door 30 is rotatably attached is replaced. When the model is replaced, the housing 1, the lower door 40, the power supply unit inside the housing 1, the hopper device 150 (see FIG. 19), etc. are left attached to the island equipment of the game arcade and are not replaced. . Further, the slot machine M is not limited to the separated type housing type, and the entire slot machine may be replaced when the model is replaced. In this case, the front door 3 may have an integral structure in which the upper door 30 and the lower door 40 are not separated. Moreover, when dividing into the upper door 30 and the lower door 40, the upper door 30 may be attached to the side plate of the housing|casing 1 via a hinge, enabling free rotation.

In addition, an engaging portion is provided at the lower end of the upper door 30 and protrudes downward from the upper end of the lower door 40 behind the front surface of the lower door 40. When the lower door 40 is closed, the upper door 30 It is a structure that cannot be released.

A medal payout port for discharging medals from the inside of the slot machine M and a medal receiving tray 43 for storing the medals discharged from the medal payout port are formed in the lower part of the lower door 40.例文帳に追加. An operation unit 50 for operating the slot machine M is provided above the lower door 40 , and a liquid crystal display panel 45 is attached between the operation unit 50 and the medal tray 43 . Illumination devices 33d are provided on both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display panel 45 for notification and effect.

The operation unit 50 is provided with a settlement button 52 as a settlement operation unit for instructing settlement processing for paying out medals. In this case, in the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button 52, medals set for at least one of bet and credit are paid out. That is, the objects of settlement based on the operation of the settlement button 52 in the present embodiment include not only the medals set for credit but also the medals set for bet. Here, as a settlement pattern by operating the settlement button 52 when medals are set for both the bet and the credit, for example, medals and credits set for the bet by the first operation of the settlement button 52 are set. A settlement pattern in which both of the medals placed on the bet are paid out at once, or a settlement pattern in which only the medals set in the bet are paid out by the first operation of the settlement button 52, and two medals set in the bet are paid out. For example, an adjustment pattern in which medals set as credits are paid out by operating the adjustment button 52 for the first time can be mentioned.
The operation unit 50 further includes a start lever 53 for starting a game, three stop buttons 54 for stopping the rotation of each of the three rotating reels, and a medal slot 42 for inserting medals. , a reject button 55 for removing jammed medals generated in the medal passage below the medal slot 42, and a MAX bet button 56 (bet button: bet operation unit) operated when betting the maximum number of three medals. , etc. are provided, and an operation panel 57 for selecting game effects, etc., and a display unit 58 are also provided. The operation panel 57 is arranged substantially in the center of the operation section 50 in the width direction (horizontal direction), and the display unit 58 is arranged on the right side of the medal slot 42 and the reject button 55 . The operation panel 57 has a cross key for selection of effects, an enter button, a cancel button, and the like.

The MAX bet button 56 is arranged to face upward and is formed to be pushed downward from above. A force required to operate the MAX bet button 56 (hereinafter referred to as operation force) is about 1.0N. Also, the MAX bet button 56 includes a pressing portion and an elastic member. The pressing portion is a member that is pressed by a player's finger or the like, and is made of resin or the like. Further, the pressing portion is urged upward by an elastic member. The elastic member is a member formed so as to bias the pressing portion and elastically deform against the biasing force when the pressing portion is pressed, and a spring or the like is used.
The stop button 54 is arranged to face forward and is formed to be pushed backward from the front. The operating force of the stop button 54 is about 0.7N. That is, the operating force of the stop button 54 is smaller than the operating force of the MAX bet button 56 .

Also, the effect button 62 described above is arranged so as to face forward and is formed so as to be pushed backward from the front. The operation force of the effect button 62 is greater than or equal to the operation force of the MAX bet button 56. - 特許庁The operating force of the effect button 62 is, for example, about 3.0N.
In addition, the stop button 54 and the effect button 62, like the MAX bet button 56, have a pressing portion and an elastic member, and the pressing portion of the stop button 54 and the effect button 62 are urged forward by the elastic member. ing.
Further, as described above, the operating force of the MAX bet button 56 is approximately 1.0N. That is, it is necessary to press the pressing portion to elastically deform the elastic member and move the pressing portion to a position where a switch ON signal (a signal indicating that the button has been pressed) is output from the sensor provided in the MAX bet button 56. The load (sensor detection load) is about 1.0N. In addition, in the game machine of the present embodiment, a photosensor is used as the sensor, but other sensors may be used as long as they can detect the pressing of the pressing portion. The photosensor outputs a switch-on signal when it detects that the light directed from the light emitting element to the light receiving element changes due to a detection object that moves when the pressing portion is pressed, for example. When a load greater than the load detected by the sensor is applied, the pressing portion moves further while elastically deforming the elastic member, and stops in contact with the mechanical stopper. The moving distance (full stroke) from the initial position of the pressing portion of the MAX bet button 56 to the contact with the mechanical stopper is about 2.0 mm, which is about twice the ON stroke. The load (maximum load) required to move the pressing portion of the MAX bet button 56 from the initial position until it abuts against the mechanical stopper is about 2.0 N, which is about twice the sensor detection load (operation force). It has become.
The stop button 54 (with an operating force of approximately 0.7 N) has a similar configuration. The ON stroke of the stop button 54 is about 1.0 mm, and the full stroke is about 2.0 mm, which is about twice that. Further, the sensor-detected load (operating force) of the stop button 54 is about 0.7N, and the maximum load is about twice that, which is about 1.4N.
In the above description, the term "about" used with respect to the operating force, load, and stroke includes variations of about ±10% due to design errors and assembly errors.

Here, a basic game flow in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described. When the player presses the MAX bet button 56, credited medals are inserted (bet), and the game can be started. Then, when the player presses the start lever 53 as an operation to start the game, the rotating reels start rotating, and when the rotational speed of the rotating reels increases to a predetermined speed, the pressing operation of the stop button 54 becomes effective. state. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button 54 at arbitrary timing, each rotating reel is stopped. Then, when all the rotating reels are stopped, according to the result of the game, a process of paying out medals, a process of making it possible to start the game again without consuming new medals, etc. are performed. Game ends.

In addition, the effect button 62 is used for notifying the player of something pleasing to the player, such as winning a bonus or deciding to move to a state advantageous to the player, or At a predetermined timing such as a winning point, the pressing operation for changing the aspect of the effect becomes effective. Then, when the effect button 62 is pressed while the pressing operation is valid, the mode of the effect image displayed on the image display device changes, or the movable accessory moves, and the mode of effect changes. do.

As is clear from the above, it is necessary to press a plurality of stop buttons 54 corresponding to the number of rotating reels for each game. At this time, the operating force of the stop button 54 is set to be smaller than the operating force of the MAX bet button 56 and the performance button 62, so that the player can obtain a light and comfortable operation feeling regarding the operation of the stop button 54. At the same time, it becomes possible to press all the stop buttons 54 at a good tempo. Therefore, the player can comfortably play the game, and the playability is improved. In addition, since the operation force of the stop button 54, which is frequently used, is set to be small, accumulation of fatigue of the player is reduced, and the playability is improved.

In addition, the MAX bet button 56 is often operated with a strong force because it is used to start a game and can be operated by hitting it from above. Since the operating force is set to be larger than that of 54, the player can obtain an operation feeling that is moderately responsive to pressing, and the playability is improved.

Also, the performance button 62 is operated less frequently than the stop button 54 and the MAX bet button 56 . In addition, the effect button 62 is put into a state in which a pressing operation for changing the mode of the effect is valid when informing the player of something that is pleasing to the player as described above, or when the player wins. Therefore, it tends to be operated with a strong force by a player who is in an excited state. Since the operation force of the performance button 62 is set to be greater than the operation force of the stop button 54 and more than the operation force of the MAX bet button 56, the player feels a heavy and heavy operation. can be obtained, and the playability is improved.

As shown in FIG. 19, inside the slot machine M, there are a main control board 70 as main control means for determining a command related to a game and transmitting the command, and a main control board 70 receiving the command from the main control board 70 and A sub-control board 72 is provided as sub-control means for executing processing corresponding to the received command. The main control board 70 includes input means such as a bet button 56 including a MAX bet button, a start lever 53, a stop button 54, a passage detection sensor 89 for detecting passage of medals inserted from the medal slot 42, and a checkout button 52. Upon receipt of the input signal, various calculations are performed for executing the game, and output means such as the reel units (reels 100a, 100b, 100c) and hopper device 150 are controlled based on the calculation results. In addition, the sub-control board 72 receives a signal (command) sent from the main control board 70, performs various calculations for executing effects, and based on the calculation results, displays corresponding to the display window 32. It controls the liquid crystal display D of the image display device including the aforementioned liquid crystal display panel provided on the upper door 30 and other liquid crystal display panels 45, and devices for presentation such as the speaker 14 and the like.

The main control board 70 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected, and various information (command signals) such as information indicating the game state can be transmitted from the main control board 70 to the sub-control board 72. However, information cannot be transmitted from the sub-control board 72 to the main control board 70 .
The functions of each board such as the main control board 70 and the sub-control board 72 are preliminarily stored in hardware such as various processors (CPU, DSP, etc.), ICs, information storage media such as ROMs and RAMs, and ROMs. It is realized by software consisting of a stored predetermined program.

The main control board 70 includes a selector control means 93 for controlling the operation of a medal selector 92 (see FIG. 19), which will be described later, an input reception means 80, a random number generation means 81, and a winning combination lottery to determine whether a winning combination is appropriate. winning combination lottery means 82, reel control means 83 for controlling the rotation of the reels, prize determination means 84 for determining whether or not the winning combination has won when all the reels are stopped, and game state control means 85. , information transmission means 86 for transmitting various information (command signals), storage means 90 , payout control means 91 , and settlement control means 95 .
The sub-control board 72 also includes an effect control means 73 for controlling various effects, a winning combination determination means 74 for performing winning combination determination processing, and a winning combination determination means 74 for determining that the winning combination is not correct (error). Initializing means 75 for resetting and initializing the sub-control board 72 in the case of doing so, and sub-side storage means 76 for storing data relating to performance are provided.

The input reception means 80 of the main control board 70 receives insertion of medals for each game, and performs processing for validating a game start operation to the start lever 53 based on the insertion of a specified number of medals. Specifically, when medals are inserted into the medal slot 42, the passage detection sensor 89 detects the passage of the medals, and the insertion receiving means 80 detects the inserted medals up to three medals. Set to the input state (bet state). Further, when the bet button 56 is pressed with medals credited, the insertion reception means 80 sets the credited medals to the insertion state, with a maximum of three medals. In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first pressing operation on the start lever 53 that is activated based on the insertion of three medals is accepted as a game start operation, and with this operation as a trigger, the reels 100a to 100c are activated. When rotation is started, a lottery such as a winning combination lottery is conducted.

In addition, the input receiving means 80 of the main control board 70 controls so that the medals owned by the player are not newly set to the input state in the next game after the game in which the replay was won. Specifically, when a replay wins in the previous game, even if medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 42 in a state in which insertion of medals is accepted, the inserted medals are not set to the inserted state. The inserted medals are credited up to the maximum number of credits (for example, 50). Further, the operation of the bet button 56 is not accepted in the state of accepting the insertion of medals, so that even if the bet button 56 is pressed, the credited medals are not set to the inserted state.

The random number generator 81 of the main control board 70 generates a random number for lottery. A random value can be generated, for example, based on the count value of an increment counter (a counter that counts numbers so as to cycle through a predetermined count range). In addition, "random numbers" are not limited to values that are generated at random in a mathematical sense. It also includes possible values.

The winning combination lottery means 82 of the main control board 70 performs a winning combination lottery using the winning combination lottery table based on the operation of the activated start lever 53 (that is, the start of the game). In the winning combination lottery table, each of a plurality of random numbers (for example, 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535) is associated with various winning combinations including minor combinations, replays and bonuses, and losses (non-winning). A plurality of winning combination lottery table storage areas provided in the ROM of the storage means 90 are stored. In the winning combination lottery, a random number for the lottery is acquired from the random number generation means 81, and this random number is collated with the winning combination lottery table to determine whether or not the winning combination has been won. The winning role will be elected.

The reel control means 83 of the main control board 70 rotates the reels 100a, 100b and 100c in response to the operation of the start lever 53 activated under the control of the main control board 70 (that is, game start). is started, and when the activated stop button 54 is operated, the stop control of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button 54 is performed.

That is, each time each button of the stop button 54 is operated, the reel control means 83 determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated button among the first reel 100a to the third reel 100c. The control is performed to stop the reel at the determined stop position. Therefore, the stop order of the first reel 100a to the third reel 100c changes depending on the operating order (hitting order) of the three stop buttons 54. FIG.

Winning determination means 84 of the main control board 70 is activated when the rotation of the reels 100a to 100c is stopped, and determines whether or not a combination has been won based on how the reels 100a to 100c are stopped. Specifically, the symbol combination displayed (stopped display) on the active line by stopping the reels 100a to 100c is collated with a prize determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM of the storage means 90. . The winning determination table stores the winning form of each winning combination (symbol combination that wins when stopped), and through the collation described above, the presence or absence of a winning combination and the type of winning combination that has won can be determined. do. When the winning combination wins, the main control board 70 executes the winning process corresponding to the winning combination.

The game state control means 85 of the main control board 70 controls between a plurality of states, for example, normal state, CBB establishment state (first bonus establishment state), CBB state (first bonus state), RBB establishment state (second bonus establishment state). state), RBB state (second bonus state), RB1 established state (specific bonus established state), and RB1 state (specific bonus state).

The information transmitting means 86 of the main control board 70 transmits a signal for notifying a winning combination, a signal for notifying a game state at the time when the winning combination is won, a signal for notifying a current game state, and other signals, which will be described later. A command signal related to medal settlement is also transmitted to the sub-control board 72 .

Also, the payout control means 91 of the main control board 70 performs payout control processing regarding the payout of medals according to the game result. Specifically, for example, when a small winning combination is won, the number of medals to be paid out in the game is determined based on a predetermined payout for each winning combination, and medals corresponding to the determined number of payouts are sent to the hopper device 150. Perform control to pay out.
Further, the selector control means 93 of the main control board 70 controls the operation of the medal selector 92, which will be described later, as described above. Specifically, the selector control means 93 receives signals from various sensors including the passage detection sensor 89 that constitutes the medal selector 92 and controls the operation of the blocker 99 that constitutes the medal selector 92 . Note that the selector control means 93 may be combined with the input receiving means 80 or the like without providing the selector control means 93 separately.

In addition, the settlement control means 95 of the main control board 70 pays out the stored medals, that is, the medals set for credit and/or bet through the hopper device 150 based on the operation of the settlement button 52. controls the execution of Note that the settlement control means 95 not only controls the execution of settlement processing based on the operation of the settlement button 52, but also, as will be described later, accepts medals accompanied by detection by the passage detection sensor 89 after completion of the settlement processing for a predetermined period of time. The operation of blocker 99 may be controlled to not allow over time. In the case of such a control mode, the adjustment control means 95 may also serve as the selector control means 93 for controlling the operation of the medal selector 92 having the blocker 99 .

On the other hand, the effect control means 73 of the sub-control board 72 cooperates with the RAM of the sub-side storage means 76 based on the effect data stored in the effect data storage area provided in the ROM of the sub-side storage means 76. , the liquid crystal display D, the speaker 14, and the lighting devices 33d, 34, 35, 37, etc., are controlled to perform the performance. Specifically, according to the insertion of medals, the operation of the bet button 56, the checkout button 52, the start lever 53, the stop button 54, the change in the game state, etc., the display contents of the liquid crystal display D are changed, and the speaker 14 By outputting a sound, etc., the game is livened up according to the progress of the game, and the execution control of the performance for assisting the game is performed. In particular, in the present embodiment, the effect control means 73, as will be described later, based on the operation of the settlement button 52, specifically in the settlement in progress state and the settlement end state described later, notifies those states. The liquid crystal display D (45), the speaker 14, and the lighting devices 33d, 34, 35, 37, etc. are controlled to output the effect sound, the effect light, and the effect image. there is

Further, in the slot machine M of the present embodiment, the blocker 99 capable of removing the medals from the medal passage selectively guides the medals inserted through the medal insertion opening 42 to the medal payout opening side or the passing detection sensor 89 side. A medal selector 92 (see FIG. 19) is provided, and medals that have been inserted during a period other than the allowed insertion period during which medals can be inserted or non-standard medals are placed in a disallowed position that causes a disallowed medal reception state. The blocker 99 in the state is guided to the medal payout port, and the medals within the standard inserted within the allowable insertion period are sent to the passage detection sensor 89 by the blocker 99 in the operation-released state in the permission position that brings about the medal reception permission state. This guides the insertion of medals so that it can be detected.
Specifically, the medal selector 92 includes an insertion detection sensor 130 (first sensor: see FIG. 19) located near the medal insertion slot 42 and a blocker 99 on the downstream side of the medal passage leading from the medal insertion slot 42 . and a passage detection sensor 89 (second sensor: see FIG. 19) located at the .
In this case, the insertion detection sensor 130 is a sensor located upstream of the blocker 99, unlike the passage detection sensor 89 located downstream of the blocker 99, and detects the insertion of medals through the medal insertion slot 42. The detection signal is sent to the main control board 70 . When the ON state of the insertion detection sensor 130 has passed for a certain period of time (for example, 0.6 seconds), the main control board 70 detects an abnormality caused by, for example, a foreign object being illegally inserted from the medal slot 42 into the medal passage. It is determined that there is
Also, the passage detection sensor 89 detects the passing of the tokens within the standard inserted within the insertion allowable period which flows down without being removed from the medal passage by the blocker 99, and sends the detection signal to the main control board 70. . The passage detection sensor 89 is composed of, for example, a photo-interrupter type infrared sensor composed of a light-emitting portion and a light-receiving portion facing each other across the medal passage. The passage of medals is detected by being interrupted by the medals flowing down the passage. When the passage of the medal is detected by the passage detection sensor 89, the game becomes possible with the medal. That is, bets or credits for the medals can be added.
Also, a blocker 99 that is positioned upstream of the passage detection sensor 89 and constitutes the medal selector 92 may operate in conjunction with, for example, a solenoid. In that case, for example, when the solenoid is in a non-excited state, the blocker 99 receives the urging force of the coil spring and is put into an operating state, and the blocker 99 can remove the medals from the medal passage. On the other hand, when the solenoid is in an energized state, the blocker is moved against the urging force of the coil spring to be in a deactivated state, and medals are guided toward the passage detection sensor 89 side to detect insertion of medals. The operation of the medal selector 92 is controlled by the selector control means 93 of the main control board 70 as described above.
In spite of the state in which the position of the blocker 99 is controlled to move to the prohibited position, the position of the blocker 99 is moved to the permitted position due to fraudulent activity or the like, causing the passage detection sensor 89 to detect medals. In this case, acceptance of the medal is not permitted, and error processing is performed without adding bets or credits. However, it is not always necessary to use such a configuration. That is, the medal reception disapproval state that does not allow reception of medals accompanied by detection by the passage detection sensor 89 can be realized, for example, by setting the position of the blocker 99 to the disapproval position. In the event that medals pass through the passage detection sensor 89 due to malfunction or fraud, the passage detection sensor 89 may detect the medals and bet or credit the medals, and the passage detection sensor 89 may detect the medals. However, the error processing may be executed, or the passage detection sensor 89 may not detect (do not react to) the medal.

Furthermore, in the slot machine M of the present embodiment, after completion of the settlement process based on the operation of pressing the settlement button 52, a settlement end effect sound such as a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed, that is, the completion of the settlement process is notified. Along with the output of the effect sound, there is a state in which the payment is being completed in which the receipt of medals accompanied by detection by the passage detection sensor 89 is not permitted for a predetermined period of time. This will be described in detail below.
Here, "detection by the passage detection sensor 89" includes both proper token passage detection and abnormal token passage detection. Also, "acceptance of medals (game media) accompanied by detection by the passage detection sensor 89" means that the passage of medals is properly detected by the passage detection sensor 89 and bets or credits are placed. Furthermore, the ``finishing state in which the reception of medals (game media) accompanied by detection by the passage detection sensor 89 is not permitted for a predetermined period'' means that the passage detection of medals by the passage detection sensor 89 itself is blocked by the blocker 99. This is a concept that includes a hardware meaning and a software meaning that no bet or credit is given even if the passing detection sensor 89 detects an abnormal passage of medals.

FIG. 20 shows a timing chart of the position of the blocker 99, the control state of the main control board 70, and the control state of the sub control board 72 regarding the settlement process executed based on the operation of the settlement button 52. Further, FIG. 21 shows a flowchart of the control operation on the main control board 70 side related to the settlement process, and FIG. 22 shows a flowchart of the control operation on the sub control board 72 side related to the settlement process. there is
As shown in FIG. 20, at the end of a predetermined game, the slot machine M is normally in the medal acceptance permitted state A in which the blocker 99 is set to the permitted position. At this time, assuming that the main control board 70 is in the non-payment state C1 without the settlement processing based on the pressing operation of the settlement button 52 (step S1 in FIG. 21), the discussion proceeds below.
This non-payment state C1 is brought about by the control of the main control board 70. FIG. In this non-settlement state C1, the blocker 99 of the medal selector 92 is in the permission position as described above, so the medals inserted through the medal slot 42 are guided to the passage detection sensor 89 and detected. be credited. Further, in this medal acceptance permission state A, the sub-control board 72 performs control to bring about the non-settlement effect state C1' (step S10 in FIG. A demonstration effect that transitions from the effect is executed.

Further, when the payment button 52 is pressed in the medal reception permitted state A, the slot machine M enters the medal reception non-permission state B (see FIG. 20). Specifically, based on the operation of pressing the settlement button 52 for a specific period of time (for example, 1 second), the main control board 70 controls the settlement control means, which may also serve as the selector control means 93 in the present embodiment. By the control by 95, the blocker 99 of the medal selector 92 described above is moved to the disallowed position. Therefore, even if a medal is inserted through the medal slot 42, the medal is guided to the medal payout slot by the activated blocker 99 at the disallowed position and ejected to the medal receiving tray 43. - 特許庁It should be noted that when the settlement process is started in accordance with the pressing operation of the settlement button 52 exceeding a specific period (for example, one second) in this way, the timing at which the blocker 99 moves to the disallowed position coincides with the pressing operation of the settlement button 52. It may be at the same time. In this way, if the blocker 99 is moved to the disallowed position in advance before the settlement process is started, the processing load of executing the settlement process and the bet or credit addition process at the same time is not generated. can be made
Further, when the settlement button 52 is pressed (if YES in step S2 in FIG. 21), the main control board 70 (settlement control means 95) sub-transmits the settlement start command via the information transmission means 86. At the same time as transmitting to the control board 72 (step S3 in FIG. 21), the hopper device 150 is operated so that the stored medals, that is, the medals set for credit and/or bet are discharged from the medal payout opening to the medal receiving tray 43. 21 (step S4 in FIG. 21).

Regarding the operation of pressing the settlement button 52 over a specific period for starting settlement, the main control board 70 does Alternatively, the processing (betting processing) for setting the credited medals to the inserted state may not be performed. That is, during the specific period, betting on medals based on the pressing operation of the bet button 56 may not be performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the contradicting processes of betting and settlement from coexisting. In this configuration, even if the bet button 56 pressed during the specific period continues to be pressed until the pressing operation of the checkout button 52 is released or until the checkout process is completed, medals will be awarded. No bets may be placed. Further, even if the settlement button 52 is pressed while the bet button 56 is being pressed and the pressing operation of the settlement button 52 is performed over a specific period, settlement processing may not be performed.
In addition, regarding the pressing operation of the settlement button 52 that exceeds a specific period for starting settlement, the main control board 70 determines that the bet button 56 is pressed during the specified period during which the settlement button 52 is being pressed. Then, processing (betting processing) for setting the credited medals to the inserted state may be performed. According to such a configuration, conflicting processes can be made compatible.

On the other hand, when the sub-control board 72 receives the settlement start command from the main control board 70 (if YES in step S11 of FIG. 22), it displays an effect image notifying that the settlement is being executed through the liquid crystal display D (45). and outputs a first effect sound (deal sound during settlement execution) for notifying that the settlement is being executed by emitting a buzzer sound through the speaker 14, and among the lighting devices 33d, 34, 35, and (step S12 in FIG. 22). In FIG. 20, both the period of the in-payment state C2 and the period of the in-payment effect state C2' are indicated by P1.

Then, when the settlement process for discharging medals to the medal receiving tray 43 along with the operation of the hopper device 150 is completely completed (if YES in step S5 of FIG. 21), the main control board 70 (the settlement control means 95) A settlement end command is transmitted to the sub-control board 72 via the information transmission means 86 (step S6 in FIG. 21), and the settlement end state C3 is set in which medal acceptance accompanied by detection by the passage detection sensor 89 is not permitted for a predetermined period of time. control is performed (step S7 in FIG. 21). That is, the settlement control means 95 of the main control board 70 keeps the blocker 99 of the medal selector 92 still in the disallowed position, and therefore the slot machine M is kept in the medal reception disallowed state B. FIG. Therefore, even if a medal is inserted through the medal slot 42 , the medal is guided to the medal payout slot by the blocker 99 in the disallowed position and ejected to the medal receiving tray 43 . This, of course, also applies to the above-described checkout in progress state C2. In other words, acceptance of medals accompanied by detection by the passage detection sensor 89 is not allowed even in the settlement in progress state C2.

On the other hand, when the sub-control board 72 receives the settlement end command from the main control board 70 (if YES in step S13 of FIG. 22), the sub-control board 72 displays the aforementioned effect image notifying that the settlement is being executed through the liquid crystal display D. While maintaining the display and the output of the above-described effect light for notifying that the settlement is being executed through at least one of the lighting devices 33d, 34, 35, and 37, the above-described first display is maintained for about two seconds, for example. A second effect sound (payment end effect sound) that notifies the completion of the settlement process, which is different from the sound effect of , specifically, in the present embodiment, a sound that notifies the completion of the settlement process (e.g., "Payment has ended" ) is output through the speaker 14 to bring about the effect state C3' during settlement (step S14 in FIG. 22).
It should be noted that the second effect sound has a constant notification time (sound output period) regardless of the settlement processing time (the time taken to pay out medals). On the other hand, the first effect sound differs in notification time (sound output period) according to the settlement processing time (the time required to pay out medals).

Here, in the present embodiment, the output of the second effect sound is completed within the period P2 (see FIG. 20) of the settlement ending state C3. That is, the effect state C3′ during settlement is over the same period P2 as the period P2 of the state C3 during settlement, while the second effect sound is output during the period P3 and the second effect sound is output. and a period of silence P4. In other words, the period P2 of the settlement ending state C3 is set longer than the period P3 of the settlement ending effect state C3' in which the second effect sound is output. Further, in the present embodiment, the time from the end of the output of the second effect sound (the end of the period P3 of the effect state C3' during settlement) to the end of the period P2 of the state C3 during settlement ( Period) P4, that is, the silent period P4 during which the second effect sound is not output is the time from when the medal is inserted from the medal slot 42 until it is detected by the passage detection sensor 89, that is, the second effect. This is set longer than the period during which the medal inserted from the medal slot 42 during sound output may remain in the medal passage leading from the medal slot 42 to the passing detection sensor 89. - 特許庁In the case of the present embodiment, the time from when the medal is inserted from the medal slot 42 until it is detected by the passage detection sensor 89 is set to approximately 0.1 to 0.65 seconds, for example approximately 0.3 seconds, Alternatively, in a modified example, the time from when the medal is detected by the insertion detection sensor 130 to when it is detected by the passage detection sensor 89 is set to about 0.1 seconds to 0.65 seconds, for example about 0.3 seconds. Therefore, the period P4 is set to approximately 0.7 seconds, for example.

Specifically, as a flow of control operation, the settlement control means 95 of the main control board 70 determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed after entering the settlement ending state C3, as shown in FIG. (step S8 in FIG. 21). Of course, the "predetermined time" (the period P2 of the settlement end state C3) in this case is a period longer than the period P3 of the settlement end effect state C3' as described above. More than the period P3 of the ending effect state C3', the time exceeds the time from when the medal is inserted from the medal slot 42 until it is detected by the passage detection sensor 89, for example, about 2.7 seconds. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after entering the settlement ending state C3 (if YES in step S8 in FIG. 21), the settlement control means 95 of the main control board 70 transmits the information transmitting means 86 to complete settlement. An intermediate state end command is transmitted to the sub-control board 72 (step S9 in FIG. 21), and control is performed to return to the above-described non-payment state C1 (step S1 in FIG. 21). Therefore, the slot machine M is in the medal acceptance permitted state A.

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 determines whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed after entering the period P3 of the effect state C3' during settlement in which the second effect sound is output, as shown in FIG. (Step S15 in FIG. 22). Of course, the "predetermined time" (period P3 of the effect state C3' during settlement) in this case is a period shorter than the period P2 of the state C3 during settlement as described above. Then, the sub-control board 72 terminates the output of the second effect sound when a predetermined period of time elapses after entering the period P3 of the effect state C3' during settlement (in the case of YES in step S15 of FIG. 22). (step S16 in FIG. 22), and control is performed so as to return to the non-payment effect state C1' (step S10 in FIG. 22).

Here, the settlement end state end command transmitted from the main control board 70 to the sub control board 72 at the end of the settlement end state C3 acts as a trigger signal for the operation on the sub control board 72 side. good too. For example, the sub-control board 72, after finishing the output of the second effect sound, until it receives the settlement completion state end command from the main control board 70, that is, during the period P4, through the liquid crystal display D, the illumination device, etc. It is also possible to execute some kind of performance for notifying the medal reception non-permission state B, and then execute a performance (for example, a demonstration performance) corresponding to the non-payment performance state at the time of receiving the settlement completion state end command. Needless to say, the main control board 70 does not need to send the settlement end state end command to the sub control board 72 at the end of the settlement end state C3. Further, in this embodiment, the passage of the predetermined time in step S15 is managed by the sub-control board 72 itself, but the passage of the predetermined time in step S15 may be managed by the main control board 70. The command signal from the control board 70 may terminate the output of the second effect sound in step S16.

In addition, during the control operation as described above, especially during the output of the second effect sound, if power interruption (power interruption)/recovery from power interruption including power failure or momentary interruption occurs, the main control board 70 side: When it returns from the middle of the settlement completion state C3, that is, when the measurement of the remaining time is restarted from the elapsed time of the settlement completion state at the time of the power failure, the settlement completion after recovery is equal to the time elapsed before the power failure. The period of state C3 is shortened. Therefore, if the sub-control board 72 side outputs the second effect sound again in this state, the period P3 of the settlement completion state C3' becomes longer than the period of the settlement completion state C3 after returning. There is a risk that it will be lost. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is preferable to prevent the sub-control board 72 from outputting the second effect sound after power failure recovery, while restoring the effect light and the effect image to the initial state. This is because if the second effect sound is resumed in the middle, the player cannot be notified of appropriate information.
Alternatively, as another example of such a power outage countermeasure, if power outage/recovery from power outage (including power outage and instantaneous power outage) occurs in the middle of the settlement execution state C2, medal settlement processing will be completed before the power outage. The calculation of the remaining medals excluding the cleared medals is restarted, and the production in the calculation execution state C2' is restarted from the output of the first production sound (sound effect and buzzer sound), and the calculation is in progress. The lighting of the effect light (for example, red lighting) for notifying that there is also restarted, but the effect image may be returned to the initial state of the demonstration effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the settlement in progress state C2, that is, after the completion of the settlement processing based on the operation of the settlement button 52, the second effect sound for notifying the completion of the settlement processing is output. In such a situation, the settlement ending state C3, which does not allow acceptance of medals accompanied by detection by the passage detection sensor 89, is entered. Therefore, generally, the second effect sound is output so that the player can easily recognize that the acceptance of medals is not allowed. In the meantime, it is possible to set the slot machine M side to the medal reception non-permission state B, so that there is no discrepancy between the recognition of the player and the actual state of the slot machine M regarding whether or not the insertion of medals can be accepted. can be made That is, it is possible to prevent the slot machine M from accepting medals in a situation where the player recognizes that the medal reception is not permitted, and therefore, the above-described unforeseen disadvantage associated with misidentification. is not given to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the output of the second effect sound is completed by the control of the sub-control board 72 within the period P2 of the settlement ending state C3 (that is, at the end of the period P3), the second effect It is possible to reliably prevent the token reception permission state from occurring during sound output, and to ensure the above-described effects.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the time P4 from the end of the output of the second effect sound (the end of the period P3 of the effect state C3' during settlement) to the end of the period P2 of the state C3 during settlement is It is set longer than the time from when the medal is inserted from the medal slot 42 until it is detected by the passage detection sensor 89 . The time from the end of the output of the second effect sound by the sub-control board 72 (the end of the period P3 of the effect state C3' during settlement) to the end of the period P2 of the state C3 during settlement is the medal slot 42. If it is shorter than the time required for the passing detection sensor 89 to detect the medals inserted from , the payment is being completed before the medals inserted during the output of the second effect sound pass the passing detection sensor 89. Since the period C3 may end and the medal may be detected by the passage detection sensor 89, as a result, it is possible to accept the insertion of the medal while the second effect sound is being output. A time P4 from the end of the output of the second effect sound by the sub-control board 72 to the end of the period P2 of the settlement ending state C3 is set by the token inserted from the token slot 42 and the passage detection sensor detects the token. If it is set longer than the time until detection by 89, it is possible to completely invalidate the medals inserted during the output of the second effect sound without accepting the inserted medals. and the actual state of the slot machine M can be reliably avoided. Furthermore, as a modification, as described above, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion detection sensor 130 during the time P4 from the end of the output of the second effect sound to the end of the period P2 of the settlement ending state C3. to be detected by the passage detection sensor 89. Such a modification can also avoid the possible discrepancy between the player's recognition and the actual state of the slot machine M regarding whether or not insertion of medals can be accepted. Further, according to this modification, the length of the time P4 can be defined based on the passage time of medals from the insertion detection sensor 130 to the passage detection sensor 89. Instead, the length of the time P4 can be uniformly determined based on the distance between the insertion detection sensor 130 and the passage detection sensor 89, which facilitates design.

Note that even after the output of the second effect sound is completed in the settlement ending state C3 (that is, during the period P4), the sub-control board 72 displays the effect image through the liquid crystal display D and/or , and by outputting effect light through at least one of the lighting devices 33d, 34, 35, and 37, it is possible to notify that the settlement is in the end state C3. That is, for example, in the settlement ending state C3 (payment ending effect state C3′), the lighting devices 33d, 34, 35, and 37 are lit red during the output of the second effect sound (period P3). In addition to announcing that it is in the ending state C3, the lighting device 33d is also in the paying ending state C3 (paying ending production state C3′) and after the output of the second production sound has ended (period P4). , 34, 35, and 37 may be illuminated in red to indicate that the settlement is being completed in the state C3. As a result, the settlement is completed, and the output of the second effect sound for notifying that effect is also completed. state) can be recognized by the player. In other words, the sub-control board 72 emits the same effect light during the notification of the effect sound in the settlement ending state C3 and during the period from the end of the effect sound notification to the end of the settlement end state. may be controlled so that is emitted. In addition, the notification of the end of settlement state through the liquid crystal display D or the lighting devices 33d, 34, 35, and 37 is the end of the end of settlement state C3 (end of settlement effect state C3') (that is, The period P4 may end at approximately the same time as the end of the period P4).

It should be noted that the effect light or effect image notifying that the settlement is in the state C3 is the effect light or effect image that notifies that the settlement is in progress C2 (the effect when medals are actually paid out). light or effect image) may be the same or different. For example, when the former production light is red lighting of the lighting devices 33d, 34, 35, and 37, the latter production light can be red lighting (similar color lighting) of the lighting devices 33d, 34, 35, and 37. Alternatively, white lighting (lighting in a different color) may be used. That is, the effect light or effect image that informs that the state C3 is in the process of completing payment means that the post-processing related to the payment is being executed, and the player can recognize that the medal acceptance is still not permitted. Just do it.

In general, when outputting a sound effect such as a voice related to the settlement process, especially when outputting a settlement end effect sound indicating that the settlement is completed at the end of the settlement process, which makes it easy for the player to be conscious of inserting medals, medals are output. In some cases, there may be a discrepancy between the player's recognition of whether or not the insertion of tokens can be accepted and the actual medal insertion acceptance state on the slot machine side. The slot machine is provided with a medal selector that selectively guides the medals inserted through the medal insertion opening by means of a blocker capable of removing medals from the medal passage to the medal dispensing opening side or passage detection sensor side. Medals inserted during a period other than the permitted insertion period or non-standard medals are guided to the medal dispensing port by the blocker in the operating state (also referred to as the medal (game media) reception disapproval state), and the insertion is permitted. Medals within the standard inserted within the period are guided to the passage detection sensor by the blocker in the deactivation state, and the medal insertion is detected (also referred to as the medal (game medium) reception permission state). When the settlement end effect sound is output after the end of the settlement process, the player generally tends to recognize that the token reception is not permitted during the output of the settlement end effect sound (until the settlement end effect sound stops). When the slot machine M side is in the medal reception permission state while outputting the end effect sound, the player who cannot be recognized as being in the medal reception permission state and the slot machine M which is actually in the medal reception permission state. There may be a time zone inconsistent with regard to whether or not medals can be accepted.
In this way, if the gaming machine accepts medals in a situation where the player recognizes that the medal reception is not permitted, there is a risk that the player will suffer an unforeseen disadvantage. For example, if the player inserts medals while the settlement end effect sound is being output, the inserted medals are accepted and betted on the gaming machine side. A player who recognizes that medal reception is not permitted during the output of the effect sound for the end of the settlement misunderstands that the inserted medals are being returned from the medal payout port side to the lower tray by the blocker. , the game may end without paying out the inserted medals by operating the checkout button. Such a situation undermines the interests of the player and is undesirable.

In the slot machine M according to the present embodiment, there is no discrepancy between the player's recognition and the actual state of the gaming machine regarding whether or not it is possible to accept the insertion of game media. That is, after completion of settlement processing based on the operation of the settlement operation unit (settlement button 52), acceptance of game media accompanied by detection by the passage detection sensor 89 is permitted in a situation where a production sound is output to notify completion of the settlement processing. Therefore, it is possible to set the gaming machine to the non-permissible state of accepting the game medium during the output of the effect sound, which is generally easily recognized by the player as being in the non-permissive state of the non-permission of the game medium. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the player's recognition and the actual state of the gaming machine regarding whether or not it is possible to accept the insertion of game media. That is, it is possible to prevent the game machine from accepting the game medium in a situation where the player recognizes that the game medium is not permitted to be accepted. No profit is given to the player. In the above configuration, "stored game media" refers to game media that are electronically stored in the game machine in relation to games.

Moreover, it is preferable that the output of the effect sound by the sub-control means (sub-control board 72) is completed within the period of the settlement ending state. According to this, it is possible to reliably prevent the game medium reception permission state from occurring during output of the effect sound. Here, ``the output of the effect sound by the sub-control means ends within the period of the settlement ending state'' means that the output of the effect sound by the sub-control means ends simultaneously with the end of the period of the settlement ending state. include.

In addition, the time from the end of the output of the effect sound to the end of the settlement end state is the time from when the game medium is detected by the first sensor (insertion detection sensor 130) to when the second sensor (passage detection sensor 89) is detected. ) is preferably longer than the time until detection by The time from the end of the output of the effect sound by the sub control means (sub control board 72) to the end of the settlement ending state is the second time after the game medium is detected by the first sensor (insertion detection sensor 130). If it is shorter than the time until it is detected by the sensor (passage detection sensor 89), the game medium inserted during the output of the effect sound passes the first sensor and is detected by the second sensor. Since the period of the settlement ending state may end and the game medium may be detected by the second sensor, as a result, it is possible to accept the insertion of the game medium while the effect sound is being output. However, the time from the end of outputting the effect sound by the sub control means (sub control board 72) to the end of the settlement completion state is detected by the second sensor after the game medium is detected by the first sensor. If it is set longer than the time until the effect sound is output, it can be invalidated without accepting the game medium inserted during the output of the effect sound. possible deviations between states can be avoided.

As shown in FIG. 18, an effect panel 61 in the slot machine M is provided with an effect button 62 as an effect operation unit used for effect (first effect operation unit used for operations related to effect). . This effect button 62 may be provided, for example, in the operation unit 50 or the like. Moreover, the pressing portion of the effect button 62 is not limited to a circular shape, and may be rectangular or the like. In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect operation unit is the effect button 62, but the effect operation unit may be, for example, a lever that can be tilted, a touch panel that can detect touch (touch of a finger or the like), or a light shielding by an object. A photoelectric sensor or the like capable of detecting such as may be used.

Hereinafter, 3 stops means an operation of pressing any effective button among the stop buttons 54 in a state where any two of the stop buttons 54 are pressed in the game. In the present embodiment, for example, when it is the timing of the game for the player, the sub-control board 72 puts the effect button 62 in a state where it is possible to accept the pressing operation (that is, the pressing operation is activated) after the 3rd stop. state). At this time, the sub-control board 72 displays a screen to that effect on the liquid crystal display D and lights the production button 62 .

Further, hereinafter, the operation panel 57 shown in FIG. 18 is assumed to be a cross button 57 as an effect setting operation section (second effect operation section used for operations related to effects). The cross button 57 is used for operations including setting effects. Production settings include, for example, volume adjustment, character selection, and the like.
The cross button 57 includes at least a main button arranged in the center and selection buttons (direction operation buttons) arranged around the main button. Selection buttons include an up button, a left button, a down button and a right button. Note that the selection button may be a plurality of buttons (independent top, bottom, left, and right) or a single button. In addition, the effect setting operation unit is not limited to the cross button (cross key), for example, one having at least two buttons, one having a main button and a jog dial, or detecting a touch (contact with a finger, etc.) A possible touch panel or the like may be used. When the cross button 57 (for example, the main button) is pressed during non-game play, the sub-control board 72 displays a menu screen on the liquid crystal display D. In other words, the cross button 57 functions as a menu screen entry button. Further, when the cross button 57 (for example, left and right buttons) is pressed during non-game play, the sub-control board 72 displays a volume change screen on the liquid crystal display D. In other words, the cross button 57 functions as a volume change screen entry button.
In addition, from the menu screen, you can set the production mode (for example, set the character that appears in the production, set the notification mode for winning a role or bonus, etc.), refer to the game history, and use the user terminal (player's smartphone). etc.), and it is possible to check the display mode of the winning combination. Also, it may be possible to set the sound volume, the light emission intensity of the lighting device, and the like from the menu screen. That is, the menu screen may also serve as the volume change screen.

When detecting that the settlement button 52 has been pressed, the main control board 70 transmits a settlement start command to the sub control board 72 and starts (executes) settlement processing (payout processing).
When receiving a settlement start command from the main control board 70, the sub control board (control means) 72 notifies execution of settlement processing (payout of game media based on operation of the settlement button 52). The sub-control board 72 displays, on the liquid crystal display D, a screen notifying that the settlement is in progress (hereinafter referred to as a settlement notification screen) as a notification of the execution of the settlement processing, and also displays an effect to notify that the settlement is in progress. A sound (hereinafter referred to as an in-payment notification sound: for example, an effect sound or a buzzer sound) is output through the speaker 14 . In addition, the sub-control board 72 outputs (lights on) a production light (hereinafter referred to as a lamp during checkout: red, for example) for notifying that the checkout is in progress through at least one of the illumination devices 33d, 34, 35, and 37. )do.

The main control board 70 transmits a settlement end command to the sub control board 72 when the settlement process is completed. Upon receiving the settlement end command from the main control board 70, the sub-control board 72 stops notification of the execution of the settlement process, and completes the settlement process (completion of payout of game media based on the operation of the settlement button 52). will be notified. The sub-control board 72 outputs, via the speaker 14, an effect sound (hereinafter referred to as "payment completion sound") for notifying the completion of the payment processing as notification of the completion of the payment processing. An example of the payment completion voice is "Payment completed". In the present embodiment, the sub-control board 72 displays the in-payment notification screen and turns on the in-payment lamp as notification of the completion of the payment processing. The screen during the notification of the completion of the settlement process (the screen indicating the completion of the settlement) may be the same as or different from the screen during the settlement (the screen indicating that the settlement is in progress).

Hereinafter, the period (period) during which the execution of the settlement process is notified is referred to as "during settlement notification". During settlement notification refers to the period from when the sub-control board 72 receives the settlement start command until it receives the settlement end command. It can be said that the game media are being paid out based on the operation of the settlement button 52 during this settlement notification.
Further, the period during which the completion of the payout of game media based on the operation of the settlement button 52 is notified, that is, the period during which the completion of the settlement process is notified is referred to as "informing completion of settlement". During settlement completion notification refers to the period from when the settlement end command is received until the output of the settlement completion voice is finished. During the settlement completion notification, after the settlement processing is completed (after the sub-control board 72 receives the settlement end command), the first sound of the settlement completion voice (for example, "se") is output. included. Further, the silent period P4 shown in FIG. 20 may be included in the settlement completion notification.

Next, using the timing chart shown in FIG. 23, a configuration example of processing during and before and after settlement processing is described. Hereinafter, the "pressing operation" of the effect button 62, the cross button 57, the settlement button 52, etc. may be simply referred to as "pressing" or "operation".
(A5, A6) After the 3 stops, the sub-control board 72 puts the effect button 62 in a state where it can be pressed (that is, a state in which the operation is valid), and displays a screen indicating that the effect button 62 can be pressed (operation instruction screen) is displayed on the liquid crystal display D. The depression of the effect button 62 at this time serves as a trigger for progressing the effect, and when the effect button 62 is pressed, the player is notified of the result of the game. Specifically, for example, during an effect that expects the winning of a bonus (including winning a so-called pseudo-bonus (transition to AT effect state)), that is, during an effect that expects the player to transition to an advantageous state. , the depression of the effect button 62 becomes effective, an operation instruction screen is displayed, and when the effect button 62 is pressed, it is notified whether or not the state will shift to an advantageous state.
(A4) Since the game is being played at the start of this timing chart, the cross button 57 is disabled.

(A1, A2) When the settlement button 52 is pressed, the main control board 70 transmits a settlement start command to the sub control board 72 and starts settlement processing (payout processing).
(A2, A3) Upon completion of the settlement process, the main control board 70 transmits a settlement end command to the sub control board 72, and the sub control board 72 receives the settlement end command from the main control board 70. , start outputting settlement completion voice.

(A4) The sub-control board 72 disables the operation of the cross button 57 during the settlement notification and the settlement completion notification. In other words, the sub-control board 72 performs control so that even if the cross button 57 is pressed during the settlement notification and the settlement completion notification, the pressing is not accepted. In other words, even if the cross-shaped button 57 is pressed during the settlement notification and the settlement completion notification, the menu screen and the volume change screen are not displayed on the liquid crystal display D (there is no shift to the menu screen or the volume change screen). The sub-control board 72 validates the operation of the cross button 57 when the output of the settlement completion voice (informing of settlement completion) ends.

In this way, by disabling the operation of the cross button 57 during the settlement notification, the notification of the execution of the settlement process is interrupted (obstructed) by the operation of the cross button 57, making it impossible to grasp that the settlement is in progress. Or, for example, a menu screen and a screen indicating that the payment is being made are displayed at the same time, and since the menu screen has a large amount of information (the number of characters), it is possible to avoid the problem that it is difficult to grasp that the payment is being made. As a result, the player can surely grasp the notification of the execution of the settlement process, and it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing (for example, recognizing as if the settlement has been interrupted). Also, if the menu screen opens during the settlement notification, it becomes difficult for people around to understand that the settlement notification is in progress. can.
In addition, by disabling the operation of the cross button 57 during the notification of completion of settlement, the notification of the completion of the settlement process is blocked (obstructed) by the operation of the cross button 57, and the notification of the completion of settlement cannot be grasped. For example, the menu screen and the screen indicating completion of payment are displayed at the same time, and the menu screen has a large amount of information (the number of characters), so the problem of difficulty in understanding the screen indicating completion of payment can be avoided. As a result, the player can surely grasp the notification of the completion of the settlement process, and it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing (for example, recognizing as if the settlement has been interrupted). In addition, if the menu screen opens during the notification of the completion of payment, it becomes difficult for people around to understand that the notification of the completion of payment is being made, and there is a risk that fraud or the like will be carried out using this, but such a problem is avoided. be able to.

(A5, A6) Even when the settlement button 52 is pressed and the settlement notification and settlement completion notification are in progress, the sub-control board 72 displays on the liquid crystal display D a screen indicating that the effect button 62 can be pressed. At the same time, the production button 62 remains valid. In other words, the sub-control board 72 accepts the depression when the effect button 62 is pressed during the settlement notification or during the settlement completion notification. Also, the effect button 62 is valid even after the settlement completion notification is finished. That is, when the effect button 62 is activated with the 3 stops as a trigger, the activation of the effect button 62 is not canceled even if the process shifts to the settlement process and the settlement is completed.
If the effect button 62 is pressed during the notification of the settlement or the completion of the settlement, the effect progresses. During this period, the liquid crystal display D displays the indication that the settlement is being executed or the completion of the settlement. . At this time, the display related to the settlement is given priority, and the display related to the settlement hides a part of the presentation related to the game.

In this way, the operation of the effect button 62 is enabled without being disabled during the settlement notification, so that the player can press the effect button 62 to proceed with the effect. Therefore, the player does not have dissatisfaction due to being unable to press the effect button 62 during the notification of settlement. For example, when the instruction screen for pressing the effect button 62 is displayed, the player may want to leave the seat after pressing the effect button 62 and seeing the result of the game. Since the effect button 62 is enabled, the effect can be advanced during the notification of the settlement and leaving the seat after seeing the result can be performed smoothly. Since the push instruction screen does not have a large amount of information (the number of characters) like the menu screen, the game player will not misunderstand even if it is displayed at the same time as the screen, although it indicates that payment is being made.
In addition, by validating the operation of the performance button 62 instead of invalidating it during the settlement completion notification, the player can press the performance button 62 to proceed with the performance. Therefore, the player does not have dissatisfaction due to being unable to press the effect button 62 during the notification of completion of payment. For example, when the instruction screen for pressing the effect button 62 is displayed, the player may want to leave the seat after pressing the effect button 62 and seeing the result of the game. However, since the performance button 62 is activated, it is possible to proceed with the performance during the notification of the completion of payment, and to leave the seat after seeing the result. Since the push instruction screen does not have a large amount of information (the number of characters) like the menu screen, the player will not misunderstand even if it is displayed at the same time as the screen indicating the settlement completion.

In addition, the sub-control board 72 turns off the effect button 62 while validating the operation of the effect button 62 during the settlement notification or during the settlement completion notification. In other words, the effect button 62 is lit, and the validity of the operation is not actively reported, but if it is pressed, the press is accepted. By doing so, it is basically not recommended to proceed with the effect during the settlement notification or during the settlement completion notification, but if the effect button 62 is pressed, the player's intention is prioritized, It is possible to proceed with the production. The sub-control board 72 may light up the effect button 62 while validating the operation of the effect button 62 during the settlement notification or during the settlement completion notification.

FIG. 23 shows the case where the settlement button 52 is pressed while the effect button 62 is not pressed. In FIG. 24, after the third stop, the effective effect button 62 is pressed, and while the effect based on the pressing of the effect button 62 is being executed, the settlement button 52 is pressed. .

(B4, B5) The sub-control board 72 displays a screen indicating that the effect button 62 can be pressed on the liquid crystal display D, and activates the effect button 62 .
(B6, B7, B8) When the activated production button 62 is pressed, the sub-control board 72 starts outputting (corresponding) liquid crystal production and audio production based on the depression of the production button 62. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 displays an effect image based on the depression of the effect button 62 on the liquid crystal display D, and outputs sound effects (BGM, lines, sound effects, etc.) based on the depression of the effect button 62 to the speaker. output via 14. The sub-control board 72 may output the effect light based on the depression of the effect button 62 through at least one of the illumination devices 33d, 34, 35, and 37.

(B1, B2) When the settlement button 52 is pressed, the main control board 70 transmits a settlement start command to the sub control board 72 and starts settlement processing.
(B1, B7, B8) When the settlement button 52 is pressed during the output of the liquid crystal effect and the sound effect based on the depression of the effect button 62, the sub-control board 72 receives the command to start settlement from the main control board 70. Based on this, the output of the voice effect is stopped. However, the sub-control board 72 does not stop (continues) the output of the liquid crystal presentation even if it receives the settlement start command.

(B2, B3) Upon completion of the settlement process, the main control board 70 transmits a settlement end command to the sub control board 72, and the sub control board 72 receives the settlement end command from the main control board 70. , start outputting settlement completion voice.

(B8) The sub-control board 72 starts outputting a sound effect (a sound effect based on the depression of the effect button 62) when the output of the payment completion sound ends (waiting for the end of the output of the payment completion sound). The sub-control board 72 does not output the sound to the outside while the output of the sound effect is stopped, and executes the sound effect behind the output of the payment completion sound (the layer behind the payment completion sound). ing. That is, when the sub-control board 72 receives the settlement start command during the output of the voice effect based on the depression of the effect button 62, the sound effect is executed but no sound is output, and the output of the settlement completion voice ends. Then, control is performed to output the sound of the voice effect again. It can also be said that the voice effect is skipping.

In this way, when the settlement process is executed while the voice effect based on the depression of the effect button 62 is being output, the output of the voice effect is stopped, and the notification regarding the settlement (the notification sound during settlement and the settlement completion voice) is output. By prioritizing the output, the player can understand through the sound that the settlement process is being executed. However, since the liquid crystal effect based on the pressing of the effect button 62 is continued even while the settlement notification sound and the settlement completion sound are being output, the player can visually confirm that the effect is progressing. can be grasped.

FIG. 24 shows the case where the valid effect button 62 is pressed and the settlement button 52 is pressed while the effect based on the pressing of the effect button 62 is being executed. FIG. 29 shows a case where the settlement button 52 is pressed first and the presentation button 62 is pressed while the settlement process is being executed.

(G4, G5) The sub-control board 72 displays on the liquid crystal display D a screen indicating that the effect button 62 can be pressed, and activates the effect button 62 .
(G1, G2) When the settlement button 52 is pressed, the main control board 70 transmits a settlement start command to the sub control board 72 and starts settlement processing.

(G6, G7, G8) When the effective state effect button 62 is pressed while the settlement process is being executed, the sub-control board 72 receives the information (signal) to that effect, and the effect button 62 is pressed. Start outputting the liquid crystal effect based on the press of . At this time, the sub-control board 72 does not output the sound effects based on the depression of the effect button 62 . This "no output of audio effect" is included in "stop output of audio effect". In other words, even if the sub-control board 72 receives the information (signal) indicating that the effect button 62 has been pressed while executing the notification regarding the settlement (during settlement notification and during settlement completion notification), the voice Do not output the performance. That is, the notification regarding the settlement is prioritized over the voice effect based on the depression of the effect button 62. - 特許庁

(G2, G3) The main control board 70 transmits a settlement end command to the sub control board 72 upon completion of the settlement process, and the sub control board 72 receives the settlement end command from the main control board 70. , start outputting settlement completion voice.
(G8) The sub-control board 72 starts outputting an audio presentation when the output of the settlement completion voice ends (waiting for the termination of the output of the settlement completion voice). The sub-control board 72 does not output the sound to the outside while the output of the sound effect is stopped, and executes the sound effect behind the output of the payment completion sound (the layer behind the payment completion sound). ing. In other words, even if the sub-control board 72 receives a signal indicating that the production button 62 has been pressed while the notification regarding the payment is being executed, the sub-control board 72 executes the audio production until the output of the payment completion audio is finished. No sound is output, and when the output of the settlement completion voice is finished, the sound of the voice presentation is output.

In the examples of FIGS. 24 and 29, to "prioritize" the settlement completion sound over the settlement completion sound, not only is the sound of the sound effect silenced, but also the sound of the sound effect is compared to the settlement completion sound. It includes outputting (flowing) by reducing it.

Next, a case where an error occurs during "payment" will be described.
First, each error detected (detected) by the main control board 70 will be described. Although not shown, the main control board 70 includes error detection means and error management means. The error detection means detects backflow error, empty error, discharge clogging error, discharge abnormality error, over error, retention error, backup error, door open error, insertion abnormality error, display judgment abnormality error based on the signal state of various sensors. , RAM abnormal error, setting value abnormal error are detected.

(1) A reverse flow error is an error caused by reverse flow of tokens in the channel.
(2) Empty error is an error caused by running out of medals stored in the hopper device 150 . Specifically, in a situation where medals are being paid out, it is detected when the signal state of the payout sensor continues for a certain period of time (approximately 2100 ms) in the OFF state (state in which the medals to be paid out are not detected). is an error.
(3) A payout clogging error is an error caused by the medals to be paid out from the hopper device 150 clogging up and not being discharged. Specifically, in a situation where medals are being paid out, the signal state of the payout sensor (medal payout switch) continues for a certain period of time (approximately 172 ms) in the ON state (state in which the medals to be paid out are detected). is an error detected when

(4) The abnormal payout error is an error caused by payout of medals in a situation where medals should not be paid out. Specifically, it is an error detected when the signal state of the payout sensor (payout medal switch) continues for a certain period of time (approximately 6 ms) or longer while no medals are being paid out.
(5) Over error is an error caused by surplus medals stored in the cash box exceeding a predetermined amount. Specifically, it is an error detected when the signal state of the overflow sensor continues for a certain period of time (approximately 100 ms) or longer (signal state indicating that the surplus medals have exceeded a predetermined amount).
(6) A retention error is an error caused by the medal selector 92 being jammed with medals. Specifically, the signal state of the first medal passage sensor or the second medal passage sensor downstream of the insertion detection sensor 130 and upstream of the blocker 99 is in the ON state (indicating that the presence of medals is detected). This is an error that is detected when the signal state continues for a certain period of time (approximately 113 ms) or more.

(7) A backup error is an error caused by an RWM backup failure. Specifically, this error is detected when an RWM backup abnormality is detected when the power is turned on. Alternatively, it is an error detected when the saved value of the stack pointer is not within a specific range when the power is turned on.
(8) A door open error is an error caused by opening the lower door 40 (front door 3). Specifically, it is detected when the signal state of the door open/close switch that operates when the lower door 40 is opened continues for a certain period of time (approximately 48 ms) or longer (signal state indicating that the lower door 40 is open). error.

(9) Throw-in error is caused by activating the blocker 99 to block the flow path to the medal chute, so that the medal flow path is switched, but the medals are placed in the normal flow path This is an error caused by passing through a different flow path than the flow path returned to the outlet. Specifically, it is an error detected when the second medal passage sensor detects medals flowing toward the medal chute after passing through the medal selector 92 after the blocker 99 has been activated. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, an error is detected when the second medal passage sensor is turned ON after a certain period of time (approximately 250 ms) has passed since the blocker 99 was closed.
In addition, there is a shooting error in the abnormal loading error. A shoot error is an error caused by a difference of a certain amount or more between the number of medals that have passed through the medal selector 92 and the number of medals that have passed through the medal shoot. Specifically, the first medal passing sensor and the second medal passing sensor are detected within a certain period of time after the inserted medal passes through the first medal passing sensor and the second medal passing sensor in the correct order. The difference between the number of medals detected as having passed through in the correct order and the number of times the shoot sensor signal state has turned on (signal state that detects the presence of medals) does not fall within a specified range. or when a certain period of time has passed since the inserted medal passed the first medal passing sensor and the second medal passing sensor in the correct order, the first medal passing sensor and the second medal passing sensor are operated in the correct order. Detected when the difference between the number of medals detected as having passed and the number of times the shoot sensor signal state has turned on (signal state that detects the presence of medals) is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. error.
In addition, there is a loading detection error in the loading abnormal error. An insertion detection error is an error caused by medals being clogged near the medal insertion slot 42 . Specifically, this error is detected when the insertion detection sensor 130 in the medal selector 92 is in the ON state (signal state detecting the presence of medals) for a certain period of time (approximately 602 ms) or longer.

(10) Display judgment abnormal error is an error detected when a symbol that is not a winning combination is displayed.
(11) RAM abnormal error is an error detected when RAM reading/writing is not performed normally.
(12) Abnormal set value error is an error detected when the set value is out of the allowable range during internal lottery.

Each error is assigned an error code from E1 to EC according to the type of error, as shown in FIG. When an error is detected by the error detection means, the error management means executes processing to report the detected error via the liquid crystal display D or the main display (display unit 58 in FIG. 18). Specifically, the error management means sets an error code corresponding to the type of detected error, and displays the set error code on the liquid crystal display D or the main display (display unit 58 in FIG. 18). Let

Further, the error management means performs a canceling process of clearing an error detection flag or the like based on the execution of a predetermined canceling operation (error canceling operation). Predetermined canceling operations (error canceling operations) include, for example, an operation of inserting a door key into a door key cylinder and rotating (twisting) the door key counterclockwise, and an operation of pressing a setting change button. As shown in FIG. 25, an error cancellation operation is set for each error type (error codes E1 to EC). When a signal is input from the setting change button or the door sensor as a result of the error cancellation operation, the error management means determines that the error cancellation operation has been performed, and clears ( delete).

When detecting an error, the main control board 70 transmits a command (error command) indicating that an error has occurred to the sub control board 72 . When the sub-control board 72 receives an error command from the main controller 70, the sub-control board 72 controls to display an image corresponding to the content of the error occurrence (hereinafter referred to as an error screen) on the liquid crystal display D, and a warning sound corresponding to the error occurrence ( hereinafter referred to as an error sound) is output via the speaker 14, and the like.

A configuration example of processing when an error occurs during notification of settlement will be described using the timing chart shown in FIG. 26 . In the following description, the case where a backflow error occurs as an error will be described, but other errors may also occur.
(C1, C2) When the settlement button 52 is pressed, the main control board 70 transmits a settlement start command to the sub control board 72 and starts settlement processing.
(C4) When the main control board 70 detects a backflow error (if the conditions for the backflow error are met), it sends a command indicating that a backflow error has occurred (backflow error command) to the sub control board 72 .

(C2, C5) Even if the sub-control board 72 receives the settlement start command and an error command (backflow error command), it does not receive the settlement end command from the main control board 70 until it receives the backflow error command. Do not perform any action based on receipt of
Upon receiving the settlement end command from the main control board 70, the sub-control board 72 executes processing based on the reception of the reverse flow error command. The sub-control board 72 notifies of the backflow error as a process based on the reception of the backflow error command. The sub-control board 72 displays a screen corresponding to the backflow error (backflow error screen) on the liquid crystal display D as notification of the backflow error, and outputs a warning sound (error sound) corresponding to the backflow error via the speaker 14. At least one of the lighting devices 33d, 34, 35, and 37 outputs (lights up) a performance light (hereinafter referred to as an error lamp: red, for example) for notifying that an error is occurring.

In this way, even if the sub-control board 72 receives the settlement end command from the main control board 70, if it receives the error command first, it preferentially performs the processing (error notification) based on the error command. conduct. Then, as described below, after the error is cleared, the sub-control board 72 performs processing (output of settlement completion voice) based on the settlement end command.

(C6) When an operator or the like inputs (executes) an error cancellation operation (error recovery process) corresponding to the backflow error, the main control board 70 issues a command indicating that the backflow error has been canceled (backflow error cancellation). command) to the sub-control board 72 .
(C3, C5) Upon receipt of the backflow error cancel command, the sub-control board 72 stops reporting the backflow error and starts outputting the settlement completion sound (“Payment completed”). The sub-control board 72 changes the display of the liquid crystal display D from the error screen to the normal screen, stops the output of the error sound, and turns off the error lamp to stop the notification of the backflow error. The sub-control board 72 may display a screen indicating completion of payment while outputting the payment completion sound (during payment completion notification), and then display the normal screen. Further, the sub-control board 72 may turn off the error lamp and turn on the in-payment lamp during the notification of completion of payment. In that case, for example, if the lighting patterns (lighting colors) of the error lamp and the in-payment lamp are the same, there is no apparent change.
The normal screen (normal image) is, for example, the image that is basically displayed (the image with the highest display ratio (probability)) in the production state during your stay, or the image that is displayed at the start of that production state. be. In other words, the normal image is an image that is displayed between games in the stay effect state.

For C3, C5, and C6, the error notification is stopped and the output of the settlement completion voice is started at the rising edge of error cancellation, but these may be performed based on the falling edge of error cancellation.

In this way, when an error (for example, a backflow error) occurs during settlement notification, the occurrence of the error is notified after the completion of the settlement process, so that the player can surely grasp that the settlement has been completed. can. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing (for example, recognizing that the settlement has been interrupted). On the other hand, since the notification of the occurrence of an error is given priority over the output of the payment completion voice, the time from the occurrence of the error to the notification of the error can be further shortened, and early measures can be taken against the error. . Further, if a configuration is employed in which an error occurrence is notified during settlement notification, the processing becomes complicated.

Note that the processing for notifying the occurrence of an error after the end of the settlement process and then outputting the settlement completion voice is not limited to the above-described processing. For example, in the above example, even if the sub-control board 72 receives an error command, it does not execute processing based on the reception of the error command until it receives the settlement end command from the main control board 70. If an error occurs during the settlement process, the main control board 70 may transmit an error command to the sub control board 72 after the settlement process is completed. Further, the main control board 70 may transmit the settlement end command to the sub control board 72 after the error is cleared (after the error clearing command is transmitted).

Next, using the timing chart shown in FIG. 27, a configuration example of processing when an error occurs during notification of settlement completion will be described.
(D1, D2) When the settlement button 52 is pressed, the main control board 70 transmits a settlement start command to the sub control board 72 and starts settlement processing.
(D7) Upon receiving the settlement start command from the main control board 70, the sub-control board 72 shifts the display of the liquid crystal display D from the normal screen to the settlement in-progress notification screen.

(D2, D3) Upon completion of the settlement process, the main control board 70 transmits a settlement end command to the sub control board 72, and the sub control board 72 receives the settlement end command from the main control board 70. , start outputting settlement completion voice.

(D4) When the main control board 70 detects a backflow error, it sends a backflow error command to the sub-control board 72 .
(D3, D5) If the sub-control board 72 receives a reverse flow error command from the main control board 70 while outputting the settlement completion voice (i.e., during settlement completion notification), the sub-control board 72 performs settlement based on the reception. Stop (cancel) the output of the completion voice ("I have paid") (for example, stop with "I have paid") and report the backflow error. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 displays a backflow error screen on the liquid crystal display D, outputs an error sound, and lights an error lamp.

(D6) When an operator or the like inputs (executes) an error cancellation operation corresponding to the backflow error, the main control board 70 transmits a backflow error cancellation command to the sub control board 72 .
(D5, D7) Upon receipt of the backflow error cancel command, the sub-control board 72 stops reporting the backflow error (stops outputting the error sound and turns off the error lamp), and clears the liquid crystal display D. Switch from the error screen to the normal screen.
(D3) Note that, in this example, even if the sub-control board 72 recovers from the error (even if it receives the backflow error cancellation command), it resumes the output of the settlement completion voice that was stopped in response to the reception of the backflow error command ( output). However, the sub-control board 72 may output a settlement completion sound along with recovery from the error (shift to the normal screen). In that case, the sub-control board 72 may output the settlement completion voice again from the beginning instead of from the place where it stopped.

In D5 and D6, the error notification is stopped at the rising edge of error cancellation, but the error notification may be stopped at the falling edge of error cancellation.
Also, in D6 and D7, the transition to the normal screen is performed at the falling edge of error cancellation, but the transition to the normal screen may be performed at the rising edge of error cancellation.

In this way, if an error (for example, a backflow error) occurs while announcing the completion of settlement, the occurrence of the error is notified without waiting for the output of the settlement completion voice to end (even during the output of the settlement completion voice). Prioritize. In other words, an error notification with a higher priority (urgency) is output with priority over the settlement completion voice. As a result, countermeasures against errors can be taken at an early stage. That is, it is possible to prevent delays in the processing of errors.

D3 and D4 show the case where an error occurs while the settlement completion voice is being output. An error may occur before "se") is output. Even in such a case, the sub-control board 72 does not output (stops outputting) the settlement completion voice, and executes notification of the error. In other words, the sub-control board 72 gives priority to the notification of the error over the output of the settlement completion sound.

Next, using the timing chart shown in FIG. 28, a configuration example of processing when the cross-shaped button 57 is pressed while the settlement completion is being notified will be described.
(F1, F2) When the settlement button 52 is pressed, the main control board 70 transmits a settlement start command to the sub control board 72 and starts settlement processing.
(F4, F7) Upon receiving the settlement start command from the main control board 70, the sub-control board 72 stops the lighting of the lamp during play (for example, white) and turns on the lighting of the settlement lamp (for example, red). Start. In the present embodiment, the lighting of the in-payment lamp and the lighting of the error lamp follow the same pattern.

(F2, F3) The main control board 70 transmits a settlement end command to the sub control board 72 upon completion of the settlement process, and the sub control board 72 receives the settlement end command from the main control board 70. , start outputting settlement completion voice.

(F3, F5) While the sub-control board 72 is outputting the settlement completion sound (i.e., during settlement completion notification) (while outputting the sound related to the payout of the game media), the cross button 57 is When operated (pressed), the operation (pressed) is accepted. In this example, the sub-control board 72 enables the operation of the cross button 57 while announcing the completion of settlement (that is, from when the settlement end command is received until the output of the settlement completion voice is finished). When the sub-control board 72 receives the information (signal) (command) indicating that the cross button 57 has been pressed while outputting the settlement completion voice, it outputs the settlement completion voice based on the received information (signal) (command). Stop the output of (for example, stop at "payment").

(F5, F6, F7) Further, when the sub-control board 72 receives information (signal) (command) indicating that the cross button 57 has been pressed while outputting the settlement completion sound, Based on the reception, the in-payment lamp is turned off, the in-game lamp is turned on, and the display of the liquid crystal display D is shifted from the in-payment notification screen to the menu screen (which may be a volume change screen). That is, when the sub-control board 72 receives information indicating that the cross button 57 has been pressed while outputting the settlement completion voice, it performs processing based on the pressing of the cross button 57 based on the reception. conduct.

In F3 and F5, the cross button 57 is pressed while the settlement completion voice is being output. The cross button 57 may be pressed before output. Even in such a case, the sub-control board 72 does not output (stops outputting) the settlement completion sound, and executes processing based on the depression of the cross button 57 . That is, the sub-control board 72 gives priority to the processing based on the depression of the cross button 57 over the output of the settlement completion sound.

Also, for F5 and F6, the falling edge of the cross button 57 causes the transition to the menu screen, but the rising edge of the cross button 57 may cause the transition to the menu screen.

In this way, when the cross button 57 is operated while the settlement completion is being notified, the operation of the cross button 57 is accepted (even during the output of the settlement completion voice) without waiting for the output of the settlement completion voice to end The operation of the cross button 57 is given priority), and processing based on the operation (moving to the menu screen, etc.) is executed. The desired settings can be made. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied (feeling stress) because the cross button 57 cannot be operated until the output of the settlement completion voice is finished.

Here, the dashed line portion Z in F4 of FIG. 28 will be described. A dashed line portion Z indicates lighting of the checkout lamp that was originally scheduled to be executed. Here, it is assumed that the cross button 57 is not pressed while the settlement completion voice is being output. In this case, even after the output of the settlement completion voice (“Payment completed”) ends, the lighting of the checkout lamp continues for a certain period of time. In other words, the sub-control board 72 outputs the settlement completion voice and lights the settlement lamp to inform the completion of the settlement processing. lighting of the lamp) is continued for a certain period of time. Note that the sub-control board 72 shifts the screen (liquid crystal display D) to the normal screen when the settlement completion voice output ends. In this way, by making the lighting of the checkout lamp longer than the output of the checkout completion sound, it is possible to recognize that the checkout process is finished for a certain period of time after the checkout process is finished. That is, after the settlement process is completed, the completion of the settlement process is notified to the surroundings for a certain period of time.

In the above, the case where the cross button 57 is operated during the notification of the settlement completion is shown, but the case where the cross button 57 is operated during the notification of the settlement may be configured in the same manner. In other words, when the settlement button 52 is pressed, the main control board 70 starts the settlement process, but the sub control board 72 outputs the settlement notification sound (that is, during settlement notification) (game medium When the cross button 57 is operated (pressed) while the sound related to the payout is being output, the operation (press) may be accepted. When the sub-control board 72 receives a command indicating that the cross button 57 has been pressed while outputting the in-payment notification sound, the sub-control board 72 stops outputting the in-payment notification sound ( In this case, the subsequent settlement completion voice is not output either). It should be noted that the sub-control board 72, upon receiving a command indicating that the cross button 57 has been pressed while outputting the in-payment notification sound, turns off the in-payment lamp and turns off the in-game lamp. may be turned on, and the display on the liquid crystal display D may be shifted from the in-payment notification screen to the menu screen (which may be the volume change screen). When the sub-control board 72 receives a command indicating that the cross button 57 has been pressed while outputting an in-payment notification sound, the sub control board 72 performs processing based on the pressing of the cross button 57 based on the reception.

When the cross button 57 (effect setting operation unit) is operated while the sound related to the payout of game media based on the operation of the settlement button 52 is being output, the sub control means 72 stops outputting the sound related to the payout. Then, processing based on the operation of the cross button 57 is performed. Since the operation of the cross button 57 is accepted without waiting for the output of the sound related to the payout to end, and the processing based on the operation (shift to the menu screen, etc.) is executed, for example, the player can It is possible to quickly open the menu screen and perform desired settings without listening to the end of the voice. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied (stressed) by not being able to operate the cross button 57 without waiting for the output of the sound relating to the payout to end.

Here, the effect setting operation part is the cross button 57 (cross key), the left and right buttons (left button and right button) are the first effect setting operation part (first effect setting operation part), and the up and down buttons (up button and Down button) is a second effect setting operation unit (second effect setting operation unit). The first effect setting operation unit may be a main button (decision button) in addition to the left and right buttons. button).

When the first effect setting operation unit is operated while the sound related to the payout of game media based on the operation of the settlement button 52 is being output, the sub control means 72 stops outputting the sound related to the payout, 1 The processing based on the operation of the effect setting operation section may be performed. In other words, when the first effect setting operation unit is operated while the sound related to the payout of game media is being output based on the operation of the settlement button 52, the output of the sound related to the payout is stopped, and the first effect setting is performed. Processing is performed based on the operation of the operation unit. On the other hand, even if the second effect setting operation unit is operated while the sound related to the payout of game media based on the operation of the settlement button 52 is being output, the output of the sound related to the payout does not stop. , the processing based on the operation of the second effect setting operation section is not performed.

As processing based on the operation of the first effect setting operation section, there is selection of a predetermined sound. Here, a sound (navigation sound) relating to a batting order navigation effect to be performed in a predetermined effect state (AT effect state) is selected from a plurality of types of sounds (voices corresponding to characters) by operating the first effect setting operation unit. It shall be possible to select (determine). Note that the voice (character) selected by the operation may be used for other notification (for example, settlement completion voice).
When the first effect setting operation section (for example, the right button) is pressed while the game is not being played, the image of the character (second character) next to the initially set character (second character) is displayed at a predetermined position on the liquid crystal display D. Along with being displayed, a voice (speech) corresponding to the second character is output. Then, when the right button is pressed again, the image of the third character next to the second character is displayed, and the voice (dialogue) corresponding to the third character is output. Then, while the image of the predetermined character is displayed (that is, selected), the decision button as the first effect setting operation section or the effect button 62 (PUSH button) as the first effect setting operation section is pressed. Then, it is determined that the sound corresponding to the character is to be the sound for a predetermined effect (batting order navigation effect, etc.).
In the above description, the case where the right button is pressed has been explained, but if the left button is pressed from the initial setting state, for example, the image of the fifth character (the last character among selectable characters) is displayed. A voice corresponding to the character is output.

Further, in this example, when the PUSH button is operated (pressed) during non-game (normal), the menu screen is displayed (shifted to the menu screen), and the second effect setting is performed while the menu screen is displayed. When the operation unit (up/down button) is operated (depressed), the cursor moves. The player can select an icon to be set, etc., from a plurality of icons.

Regarding the case where the settlement button 52 is pressed, if the first effect setting operation unit (for example, the right button) is operated (pressed) while the sound related to the payout of game media based on the operation of the settlement button 52 is being output. , the output of the sound related to the payout stops. Then, the processing based on the operation of the first effect setting operation section is performed, that is, the image of a predetermined character is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the character (currently selected type of sound) is output. At this time, when the first effect setting operation section is pressed again, the next character image is displayed and the sound corresponding to that character is output. Then, when the decision button or the PUSH button as the first effect setting operation section is pressed, it is determined that the selected sound is the sound associated with a predetermined effect (batting order navigation effect, etc.).

Note that even if the second effect setting operation unit (upper and lower buttons) is operated (depressed) while the sound related to the payout of game media based on the operation of the settlement button 52 is being output, the output of the sound related to the payout is stopped. No processing is performed based on pressing of the up or down button.

Also, while the PUSH button is outputting the sound related to the payout of game media based on the operation of the settlement button 52, the PUSH button functions as the determination button (first effect setting operation section) as described above, but other buttons does not function as (does not accept operations). In other words, when the PUSH button is pressed during non-playing (normal operation), the menu screen is displayed (it is possible to shift to the menu screen), but the sound related to the payout of game media based on the operation of the settlement button 52 is displayed. is being output, the push is not accepted and the menu screen is not displayed. On the other hand, while the sound related to the payout of game media based on the operation of the settlement button 52 is being output, the left and right buttons are pressed, a predetermined sound (predetermined character) is selected, and the PUSH button (determination) is pressed. button) is accepted.

The sound associated with the payout of game media based on the operation of the settlement button 52 may be the same as the notification sound (error sound) output when an error occurs.
Here, it is assumed that a predetermined operation has been performed and a menu screen including a volume adjustment icon is displayed. Also, the liquid crystal display D is a touch panel, and selection can be made by operating (touching) icons displayed on the screen. When the settlement button 52 is operated, a sound related to payout of game media based on the operation of the settlement button 52 is output. When the touch panel (the volume adjustment icon displayed on the touch panel) as the first effect setting operation unit is operated (touched) while the sound related to the payout is being output, the payout of the game media is performed. The output of the sound (error sound) is stopped (cancelled), and processing based on the operation of the first effect setting operation section is performed, that is, the volume adjustment screen is displayed (the menu screen shifts to the volume adjustment screen). .

However, if the first effect setting operation unit (touch panel) is operated during the output of the sound related to the payout of the game medium and the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the adjustment based on the operation of the adjustment button 52 is completed (adjustment processing or until the output of the settlement completion voice is completed), the cross button 57 and the PUSH button are not enabled. In other words, even if the cross-shaped button 57 and the PUSH button are pressed, no processing is performed based on the pressing (pressing the cross-shaped key does not change the volume). Then, when the settlement is completed, the cross button 57 and the PUSH button are enabled.
Even if the second effect setting operation unit (upper and lower buttons) is operated (pressed) while the payout sound based on the operation of the settlement button 52 is being output, the payout sound does not stop. Processing based on pressing of the up and down buttons is not performed.

(Fourth embodiment)
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a case where the present invention is applied to a slot machine, which is one type of gaming machine, will be described as an example. good too.
As shown in FIG. 30, a slot machine (gaming machine) 10 of the present invention includes a box-shaped housing 11 whose front side, which is a surface facing a player, is open, and the front side opening of the housing 11 is opened and closed. A front door 12 is provided. The housing 11 accommodates a reel unit in which a rotatable first reel 20a, a second reel 20b and a third reel 20c are unitized, a hopper device for paying out medals (game value), and the like. The front door 12 is divided into an upper door 12a and a lower door 12b.

The upper door 12a is provided with a liquid crystal display (display means) 13, a device for presentation such as a speaker (sound output means) 14, and a display window 16. As shown in FIG. The liquid crystal display 13 displays images (moving images and still images) for various effects. In addition, the speaker 14 outputs sounds for various effects (music, sound effects, voice, etc.). In addition to the liquid crystal display 13 and the speaker 14, the device for presentation may be provided with an illumination device such as a lamp (LED), or a movable accessory operable by an actuator or the like.

Behind the display window 16, a reel unit is arranged so that a part thereof can be visually recognized from outside the display window 16.例文帳に追加A plurality of types of symbols are arranged in a line on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 20a to 20c. pattern) is displayed. The display window 16 is provided with upper, middle, and lower display positions for visually recognizing the symbols on the reels 20a to 20c. It is In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the pay line is composed of the upper stage of the first reel 20a, the middle stage of the second reel 20b, and the lower stage of the third reel 20c. In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the number of medals required for one game (specified number) is set to three, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the activated line is activated. be.

As shown in FIG. 31, on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 20a to 20c, 7 red symbols "red 7", 7 blue symbols "blue 7", BAR symbol "BAR", special symbol A "SPA", and special symbol B. "SPB", replay symbol "RP", bell symbol A "BLA", bell symbol B "BLB", watermelon symbol "WM" and cherry symbol "CH" are arranged. Symbol numbers 0 to 19 are associated with the symbols on the reels 20a to 20c.

In the slot machine 10, the reels 20a to 20c start rotating at the start of the game, and an internal lottery is executed to determine whether one of the winning combinations wins or loses (no win). Next, when the reels 20a to 20c are stopped and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination won in the internal lottery is displayed on the activated line, this winning combination wins, and the processing corresponding to the winning combination (winning processing) is executed.

Below the display window 16, a game information display section 17 and an advantageous section display 18 are provided. The game information display unit 17 includes an LED, a lamp, a 7-segment display, and the like, and displays various game information such as the number of medal credits, the number of medals paid out or won in one game, and error information. In addition, the advantageous section indicator 18 has an LED, and by lighting and extinguishing of this LED, it is notified whether or not the player is staying in the advantageous section.

A door key cylinder 19 is provided on the lower door 12b, and a door key can be inserted into the door key cylinder 19 to unlock the lower door 12b (front door 12). Specifically, the lower door 12b can be unlocked by rotating (twisting) the door key inserted into the door key cylinder 19 clockwise from the initial position. Further, by rotating (twisting) the door key inserted into the door key cylinder 19 counterclockwise from the initial position, the error can be canceled.

The lower door 12b also has a medal slot 22 for inserting medals, a bet button 23 for betting credited medals, a start lever (game start operation means) 24 operated when starting a game, and a rotating Stop buttons (stop operation means) 26a, 26b, and 26c for stopping reels that are running, a production button 160 that can change the mode of production (production image) by pressing at a predetermined timing, and a hopper. A payout port 27 for paying out medals by the device and a medal tray 28 for receiving the medals paid out from the payout port 27 are provided.

In the slot machine 10, operation of the start lever 24 is validated by inserting medals into the medal slot 22 or by operating the bet button 23 to bet a specified number of medals. Also, when the activated start lever 24 is operated, the game is started. When the game starts, the reels 20a to 20c start rotating, and when the rotation speed of each reel 20a to 20c reaches a constant speed and becomes steady rotation, the operation of the stop buttons 26a to 26c is enabled. Further, when the activated stop buttons 26a to 26c are operated, the reels 20a to 20c corresponding to the operated stop buttons 26a to 26c are stopped.

As shown in FIG. 32, inside the slot machine 10, a main control board (main control device) 31 and a sub control board (sub control device) 32 are provided. The main control board 31 receives input signals from input means such as the bet button 23, the start lever 24, and the stop buttons 26a to 26c, performs various calculations for executing the game, and based on the calculation results, the reel unit Also, it controls output means such as a hopper device. Further, the sub-control board 32 receives a signal sent from the main control board 31, performs various calculations for executing effects, and controls the liquid crystal display 13, speaker 14, etc. for effects based on the calculation results. Control the device.

The main control board 31 and the sub-control board 32 are electrically connected, and various information (signals) such as information indicating the game state can be transmitted from the main control board 31 to the sub-control board 32. However, information cannot be transmitted from the sub-control board 32 to the main control board 31 .
The functions of each board such as the main control board 31 and the sub-control board 32 are preliminarily stored in hardware such as various processors (CPU, DSP, etc.), ICs, information storage media such as ROMs and RAMs, and ROMs. It is realized by software consisting of a stored predetermined program.

The main control board 31 includes an input receiving means 40, a random number generating means 41, an internal lottery means 42 that performs an internal lottery to determine whether a winning combination is appropriate, a reel control means 43 that controls the rotation of the reels, and all the reels. Winning judgment means 44 for judging whether or not a winning combination has won when is stopped, payout control means 45, replay control means 46, setting change means 47, initialization means 48, and game state control means 49 , instruction function control means 51 , effect main control means 52 , error detection means 110 , error management means 111 and storage means 60 . Moreover, the storage means 60 includes a ROM and a RAM.
In addition, the sub-control board 32 includes a performance sub-control means 90 and a sub-side storage means 92 . Also, the sub-side storage means 92 has a ROM and a RAM.

The production main control means 52 and the production sub-control means 90 constitute the production control means 100 . The effect main control means 52 issues an instruction to the effect sub-control means 90 based on the game state, the effect state, and the like. In addition, the effect sub-control means 90 controls the effect stored in the sub-side storage means 92 based on the information on the game state and the effect state transmitted from the effect main control means 52, or the information on whether or not to perform the instruction effect. The data is used to control devices for presentation. The control performed by the effect main control means 52 described in this embodiment may be performed by the effect sub-control means 90 , and the control performed by the effect sub-control means 90 may be performed by the effect main control means 52 . Further, the control performed by the effect control means 100 described in this embodiment may be performed by the instruction function control means 51 , and the control performed by the instruction function control means 51 may be performed by the effect control means 100 .

The input reception means 40 receives insertion of medals for each game, and performs processing for activating the game start operation for the start lever 24 based on the fact that a specified number of medals have been inserted. Specifically, when medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 22, the insertion receiving means 40 sets the inserted medals to the inserted state (bet state) within a specified number. Further, when the bet button 23 is pressed while medals are credited, the insertion reception means 40 sets the credited medals to the insertion state within a specified number. In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first pressing operation on the start lever 24 that is activated based on the insertion of a specified number of medals is accepted as a game start operation, and the reels 20a to 20c are triggered by this operation. When rotation is started, a lottery such as an internal lottery is conducted.

In addition, the input receiving means 40 controls so that the medals owned by the player are not newly set to the input state in the next game after the game in which the replay was won. Specifically, when a replay wins in the previous game, even if medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 22 in a state in which insertion of medals is accepted, the inserted medals are not set to the inserted state. The inserted medals are credited up to the maximum number of credits (for example, 50). Further, the operation of the bet button 23 is not accepted in the state of accepting the insertion of medals, so that even if the bet button 23 is pressed, the credited medals are not set to the inserted state.

The random number generator 41 generates a random number for lottery. A random value can be generated, for example, based on the count value of an increment counter (a counter that counts numbers so as to cycle through a predetermined count range). In the present embodiment, "random numbers" include not only values that are generated randomly in a mathematical sense, but also values that are generated regularly but are substantially contains values that can act as random numbers.

The internal lottery means 42 performs an internal lottery using the internal lottery table based on the operation of the activated start lever 24 (that is, game start).
In the internal lottery table, each of a plurality of random numbers (for example, 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535) is associated with various winning combinations including small winnings, replays and bonuses, and losing (not winning). , and a plurality of them are stored in the internal lottery table storage area 61 provided in the ROM of the storage means 60 . In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as will be described later, as the game state, it is possible to set the normal state, the RBB internal state, and the RBB operating state. A value can be set, and the internal lottery means 42 selects an internal lottery table according to the game state and the set value and performs an internal lottery.
Incidentally, a small combination is a combination in which a predetermined number of medals corresponding to the winning small combination can be paid out by winning. A replay is a winning combination that allows the player to play the game again without consuming new medals. When the replay wins, the operation of the start lever 24 is validated without using the player's medals, and the game can be started by operating the start lever 24.例文帳に追加

In the internal lottery, a random number for lottery is obtained from a random number generation means 41, the random number is collated with an internal lottery table to determine whether or not a winning combination has been won, and winning is associated with the random number. A role is won. Specifically, the internal lottery table is provided with a plurality of winning areas as shown in FIG. there is The winning area includes a winning area containing one or more winning combinations (associated with a winning combination) and a winning area containing no winning combination (associated with a losing combination). . In addition, the combination of winning combinations included in each winning area is different. All the winning combinations belonging to the winning area associated with the random number obtained from the random number generating means 41 are won as a result of the internal lottery. In the following, in the internal lottery, winning a combination belonging to the winning area is also referred to as "winning the winning area". In addition, the case where none of the roles is won is also referred to as "the winning area 'not winning' wins".

As shown in FIG. 33, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, small wins 1 to 45 are prepared as small wins. In addition, as winning areas that include small wins, "small win ALL", "three ALL", "one ALL", "batting order bell A blue 1" to "batting order bell A blue 4", "batting order bell A red 1""~"Batting order bell A red 4","Batting order bell B blue 1"~"Batting order bell B blue 4","Batting order bell B red 1"~"Batting order bell B red 4","Batting order bell A1"~"Batting order Bell A4", "batting order bell B1" to "batting order bell B4", "batting order chance role 1" to "batting order chance role 10", "common 3 cards 1", "common 3 cards 2", "common 1 card", "Watermelon", "chance A", "chance B", "weak cherry" and "strong cherry" are prepared. In addition, the small winning combination 1 to the small winning combination 17 are 15 medal winning combinations in which 15 medals are paid out when winning, and the small winning combination 18 is a 14 winning combination in which 14 medals are paid out when winning. The 19th and 20th prizes are 3 prizes in which 3 prizes are paid out, and the small prizes 21 to 45 are 1 prizes in which 1 prize is paid out.
In the following, the winning areas "Battering order bell A blue 1" to "Bating order bell A blue 4", "Bating order bell A red 1" to "Bating order bell A red 4", "Battering order bell B blue 1" to "Bating order bell B Blue 4", "Battering order bell B Red 1" to "Battering order bell B Red 4", "Battering order bell A1" to "Battering order bell A4" and "Battering order bell B1" to "Battering order bell B4" are collectively referred to as the batting order bell. I will call.

The winning area "small winning combination ALL" is a winning area in which all the small winning combinations (small winning combination 1 to small winning combination 45) are won in duplicate. In addition, the winning area “3 pieces ALL” is a winning area in which all the 3-card combinations (small combination 19, small combination 20) are won in duplicate. In addition, the winning area "1 card ALL" is a winning area in which all single winnings (small winning combination 21 to small winning combination 45) are won in duplicate. In addition, the winning areas "Batting order bell A blue 1" to "batting order bell A blue 4", "batting order bell A red 1" to "batting order bell A red 4", "batting order bell B blue 1" to "batting order bell B blue 4" ” and “Batting Order Bell B Red 1” to “Batting Order Bell B Red 4” are winning areas in which any one of the 15-card combinations and the one-card combination are won. In addition, in the winning areas "Battering order bell A1" to "Battering order bell A4" and "Battering order bell B1" to "Battering order bell B4", any two of the 15 combinations and one combination will be won. area. In addition, the winning areas "batting order chance role 1" to "batting order chance role 10" are winning areas in which 15-card roles (small role 17), 14-card roles (small role 18) and 1-card role are won in duplicate. It's becoming In addition, the winning areas "Common 3-card 1" and "Common 3-card 2" are winning areas in which a 3-card combination (small combination 20) and a 1-card combination are won. In addition, the winning area "Common 1-card" is a winning area in which a plurality of types of 1-card combinations are won. In addition, the winning areas "Watermelon", "Chance A", "Weak Cherry" and "Strong Cherry" each have a different single role (small role 43, small role 44, small role 41 or small role 42). It has become a winning area to win. In addition, the winning area "Chance B" is a winning area in which a 3-card combination (small combination 19) is won alone.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, Replay 1 to Replay 7 are prepared as replays. In addition, "replay 1" to "replay 4" are prepared as winning areas including replays.

The winning areas "Replay 1" to "Replay 4" are winning areas in which a plurality of types of replays are overlapped and won.

Also, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, a big bonus is prepared as a bonus. In addition, as a winning area associated with a bonus, a winning area "RBB" where a big bonus is won alone is prepared, and a winning area "common 1 sheet", "watermelon", "chance A", " Chance B”, “weak cherry” and “strong cherry” are set so that the big bonus is won in duplicate. In addition, the winning areas "common 1 card", "watermelon", "chance A", "chance B", "weak cherry" and "strong cherry" are big bonuses when the game state is normal medium state. is won in duplicate, while the big bonus is not won in duplicate when the gaming state is the RBB internal middle state.
In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the bonus is assumed to be an accessory continuous operation device related to a so-called first class special accessory, but other bonuses may be used. Also, other bonuses may be installed together. Also, the loaded bonuses may be set so that they are individually won, or they may be set so that they are won in combination with replays and minor wins.

In addition, "not winning" is prepared as a winning area associated with losing.

Each winning area is set to be a winning area or not depending on the game state. In other words, the internal lottery means 42 selects an internal lottery table according to the game state and performs an internal lottery, thereby changing the winning combination. In other words, in each game state, an internal lottery is performed using an internal lottery table whose lottery targets include winning areas that can be won in each game state. In FIG. 33, whether or not each winning area can be won in each game state is indicated by a "o" mark. That is, the winning areas "non-winning", "minor win ALL", "3 cards ALL" and "1 cards ALL" are won when the game state is the RBB operating state, and when the game state is the general medium state or the RBB internal medium state. It is designed not to be elected. In addition, the winning areas "Batting order bell A blue 1" to "batting order bell A blue 4", "batting order bell A red 1" to "batting order bell A red 4", "batting order bell B blue 1" to "batting order bell B blue 4" ", "Batting order bell B red 1" ~ "Batting order bell B red 4", "Batting order bell A1" ~ "Batting order bell A4", "Batting order bell B1" ~ "Batting order bell B4", "Batting order bell B red 1" ~ " Batting Order Chance Role 10", "Common 3 Pieces 1", "Common 3 Pieces 2", "Common 1 Piece", "Watermelon", "Chance A", "Chance B", "Weak Cherry" and "Strong Cherry" ” is won when the game state is the normal state or the RBB internal state, and is not won when the RBB is in operation. Also, the winning area "RBB" wins when the game state is normal state, and does not win when the RBB internal state or RBB operating state.

Each winning area is assigned a different winning area number. Each winning area can be identified by the winning area number.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small combination is the same between the normal medium state and the RBB internal medium state. Also, the probability of winning the replay is the same between the general medium state and the RBB internal medium state. In addition, the replay is not won while the RBB is in operation. In other words, the probability of winning a replay is higher in the general intermediate state and the BB internal intermediate state than in the RBB active state.

The internal lottery means 42 sets the winning flag corresponding to the winning combination as a result of the internal lottery from the non-winning state (OFF state) to the winning state (ON state). In addition, when a plurality of winning combinations are won in duplicate, the winning flag corresponding to each of the winning combinations in duplicate is set from the non-winning state to the winning state. Also, the winning flag setting information is stored in a winning flag storage area 62 provided in the RAM of the storage means 60 .

Winning flags include a winning flag (carry-over possible flag) that allows the winning state to be carried over to subsequent games until a prize is won, and a non-winning state in which the winning state is not carried over to subsequent games regardless of winning. There is a winning flag (non-carryover flag) that is reset to . There is a big bonus as a combination to which the carryover possible flag is associated. Further, the combination to which the carryover impossible flag is associated includes a small combination and a replay. For example, when the internal lottery wins the big bonus, the internal lottery means 42 carries over the winning state of the big bonus winning flag until the big bonus wins. At this time, the internal lottery means 42 performs an internal lottery to determine the success or failure of the small combination and replay even in the game in which the winning flag of the big bonus is carried over. That is, in a game in which the winning state of the winning flag of the big bonus is carried over, if a small combination or replay is won, the winning flag of the big bonus that has already been won and the small combination or replay won in the internal lottery Winning flags corresponding to two or more kinds of winning combinations are set in a winning state.

In addition, the slot machine 10 has six setting values from setting 1 to setting 6, and the probability of winning a combination differs depending on the difference in setting values. Specifically, when the setting changes, the internal lottery table group consisting of a plurality of internal lottery tables selected according to the gaming state is changed to the internal lottery table group associated with each setting. Depending on the setting, the internal lottery table group changes with different odds of winning small wins, replays, and bonuses.

The setting change means 47 performs control to change the setting values stored in the setting value storage area 63 provided in the RAM of the storage means 60 . Specifically, a setting change key is inserted into a setting change key cylinder provided inside the slot machine 10, and the slot is opened in a state in which the setting change key (setting change key cylinder) is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the initial position. When the power of the machine 10 is turned on, the setting change means 47 activates the slot machine 10 in the setting change mode. The setting value can be selected from 6 levels from setting 1 to setting 6, and an internal lottery is conducted so that the expected value of the ball output rate increases in order from setting 1 to setting 6. The winning probability of is fluctuating. In the setting change mode, the setting change means 47 performs setting 1→setting 2→ . When the set value is changed and the start lever 24 is pressed, the set value is determined and the determined set value is stored in the set value storage area 63 . Also, by returning the setting change key inserted in the setting change key cylinder to the initial position, it is possible to shift from the setting change mode to the game mode.
In the present embodiment, the level of the set values is expressed in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. FIG.

Also, when the power is turned on while the setting change key cylinder is in the initial position, the slot machine 10 is started in the game mode. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a game can be played in the game mode, but the setting values cannot be changed, and in the setting change mode, the setting values can be changed, but the game cannot be played. It is not possible.

The initialization means 48 performs an initialization process for initializing at least part of the information stored in the RAM of the storage means 60 when the setting value is changed. Specifically, when the setting value is changed, the initialization means 48 performs a process of returning the game state, the game section, and the effect state, which will be described later, to the initial state. That is, when the set value is changed, the game state becomes the normal medium state, the game section becomes the non-advantageous section, and the presentation state becomes the non-advantageous section presentation state. will be in the same state as In the initialization process, the initialization means 48 also initializes information related to effects stored in the RAM of the storage means 60, and the like. The sub-control board 32 also has initialization means (not shown). When the main control board 31 sends a signal notifying that the set value has been changed, the initialization means of the sub-control board 32 The information about the performance stored in the RAM of the sub-side storage means 92 is initialized.
In addition, even if the setting value is changed, the game state, the game section, or the effect state may not return to the initial state.

The reel control means 43 starts the rotation of the reels 20a to 20c in response to the operation of the start lever 24 activated under the control of the main control board 31 (that is, game start), and activates the reels 20a to 20c. When the stopped stop button 26a to 26c is operated, stop control of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button is performed.

That is, each time one of the stop buttons 26a to 26c is operated, the reel control means 43 determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated button among the first reel 20a to the third reel 20c. , to stop the reel at the determined stop position. In the slot machine 10, when the stop button 26a is operated, the rotation of the first reel 20a is stopped, and when the stop button 26b is operated, the rotation of the second reel 20b is stopped and the stop button 26c is operated. Then, the rotation of the third reel 20c is stopped. Therefore, the stop order of the first reel 20a to the third reel 20c changes depending on the operation order (hitting order) of the stop buttons 26a to 26c.

In the following description, regarding the order of stop operations (order of operation of the stop buttons 26a to 26c), the order of a group of stop operations in which all of the stop buttons 26a to 26c are operated will be referred to as "hitting order". Among the stop operations that constitute the batting order, the first stop operation is the "first stop operation", the second stop operation is the "second stop operation", and the third stop operation is the "third stop operation". ”.

Further, hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 26a, 26b, and 26c for stopping the rotating reels in the order of the first reel 20a, the second reel 20b, and the third reel 20c is defined as "hitting order 1", and the first reel 20a and the third reel are operated. The operation of the stop buttons 26a, 26b, and 26c to stop the rotating reels in the order of 20c and the second reel 20b is set to "batting order 2", and the rotating reels are stopped in the order of the second reel 20b, the first reel 20a, and the third reel 20c. The operation of the stop buttons 26a, 26b, and 26c is defined as "batting order 3", and the operation of the stop buttons 26a, 26b, and 26c for stopping the rotating reels in the order of the second reel 20b, the third reel 20c, and the first reel 20a is designated as "hitting order 4". ”, and the operation of the stop buttons 26a, 26b, 26c for stopping the rotating reels in the order of the third reel 20c, the first reel 20a, and the second reel 20b is set to “hitting order 5”, and the third reel 20c, the second reel 20b, The operations of the stop buttons 26a, 26b, and 26c for stopping the rotating reels in the order of the first reel 20a are referred to as "batting order 6".

In stop control when the stop buttons 26a to 26c are operated, the reel control means 43 stops the reels 20a to 20c so that the winning combination whose winning flag is set to the winning state wins. Specifically, when the winning flag for one winning combination is set to the winning state, the reels 20a to 20c are controlled to stop so that this winning combination wins. Further, in a state in which the winning flags of a plurality of winning combinations are set in a winning state, the reels 20a to 20c are stopped so that a predetermined winning combination wins according to the priority determined for each combination. Let In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority order is determined in the order of "replay>small win>bonus". Then, the reel control means 43 controls the reels 20a so that the symbols forming the winning pattern of the winning combination with the higher priority are displayed on the activated line in preference to the symbols forming the winning pattern of the winning combination with the lower priority. ~20c is stopped.

In addition, when multiple types of small wins are won in the internal lottery, the priority of the candidates for the stop position is determined according to the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on the active line, There is also a case where the priority is obtained according to the number of medals to be paid out based on the determined payout. When determining the priority of candidates for the stop position according to the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on the active line, the stop position that has the greater number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on the active line has higher priority. A priority is obtained for each stop position candidate such that the priority is higher. When determining the priority of candidates for the stop position according to the number of medals paid out, a stop that increases the number of medals paid out based on the payout of the small win corresponding to the symbol displayed at the display position on the activated line. The priority of each stop position candidate is determined so that the position (stop position that allows a small combination with a large payout to be won) has a higher priority. However, when determining the priority of candidates for the stop position according to the number of medals paid out, if multiple small wins with the same payout are won, each stop position can win a prize. are treated as having the same priority.

As shown in FIG. 34, a correct hitting order and an incorrect hitting order are set for each batting order bell. FIG. 34 shows the relationship between the mode of the stop operation and the winning combination when each winning area is won in the middle state of the RBB. Each winning area of the batting order bell is designed so that 15 pieces can be won if operated in the correct hitting order when winning in the middle state inside the RBB, and 1 piece can be won if operated in the incorrect hitting order. Roles are made available to win prizes. In other words, when one of the batting order bells is won in the middle state of the RBB, if the stop buttons 26a to 26c are pressed in the correct batting order, priority is given to stop position candidates that can win small wins 1 to 16. The priority is determined so that the order is the highest, and when the stop buttons 26a to 26c are pressed in the order of incorrect hitting, the priority of the stop position candidate that can win the small win 21 to 40 is the highest. A higher priority is required.

Specifically, the winning areas "batting order bell A blue 1" to "batting order bell A blue 4" and "batting order bell B blue 1" to "batting order bell B blue 4" are operated in the correct batting order, and the first A symbol within a predetermined range including 7 blue symbols (for example, one of the symbol numbers 0 to 9) on the reels 20a to 20c stopped at a predetermined display position (for example, on the active line). When the first stop operation is performed while the player is playing, the 15-card hand is awarded. In other words, it is possible to win a 15-card combination by operating in the order of correct strokes and performing the first stop operation aiming at the blue 7 symbols. In addition, "batting order bell A blue 1" to "batting order bell A blue 4" and "batting order bell B blue 1" to "batting order bell B blue 4" are displayed when the operation is performed in the incorrect batting order and in the correct batting order. A pattern within a predetermined range not including the blue 7 pattern (for example, any one of the pattern numbers 10 to 19) on the reels 20a to 20c that are operated and stopped first is displayed at a predetermined display position (for example, the effective line If the first stop operation is performed while the player is positioned at the top), either a one-card winning combination or no winning combination is awarded.

In addition, the winning areas ``batting order bell A red 1'' to ``batting order bell A red 4'' and ``batting order bell B red 1'' to ``batting order bell B red 4'' are operated in the correct batting order and stopped first. When a symbol within a predetermined range including 7 red symbols (for example, one of symbol numbers 10 to 19) on the reels 20a to 20c is positioned at a predetermined display position (for example, on the active line) When the first stop operation is performed at , the 15-card hand is awarded. In other words, it is possible to win a 15-card combination by operating in the order of correct hitting and performing the first stop operation aiming at 7 red symbols. In addition, "batting order bell A red 1" to "batting order bell A red 4" and "batting order bell B red 1" to "batting order bell B red 4" are operated in the incorrect batting order and in the correct batting order. A symbol within a predetermined range (for example, any symbol between symbol numbers 0 to 9) that does not include the red 7 symbols on the reel that is operated and stopped first is displayed at a predetermined display position (eg, on the active line). If the first stop operation is performed while the player is in the position, either a single winning combination is won or no winning combination is won.

Also, the winning areas "batting order bell A1" to "batting order bell A4" and "batting order bell B1" to "batting order bell B4" are designed to win a 15-card combination when operated in the correct batting order. In addition, "batting order bell A1" to "batting order bell A4" and "batting order bell B1" to "batting order bell B4" are operated in an incorrect batting order to win either one hand or any hand. It is designed not to.

In addition, one correct batting order for each batting order bell is determined, and the other five batting orders are defined as incorrect batting orders. In addition, the winning areas "Batting Order Bell A Blue 1" to "Batting Order Bell A Blue 4" have different batting orders set to the correct batting order. , different batting orders are set in the correct batting order, and in the winning areas "batting order bell B blue 1" to "batting order bell B blue 4", mutually different batting orders are set in the correct batting order, and the winning area "batting order bell B Red 1" to "B Red 1" to "B Red 4" have different batting orders set to the correct batting order, and "Batting order bell A1" to "Batting order bell A4" have different batting orders to the correct batting order. , "batting order bell B1" to "batting order bell B4" are set to have different batting orders as correct batting orders. In addition, the winning area "batting order bell A blue 1" to "batting order bell A blue 4", the winning area "batting order bell A red 1" to "batting order bell A red 4", the winning area "batting order bell B blue 1" to "batting order" Bell B Blue 4", winning area "Batting Order Bell B Red 1" ~ "Batting Order Bell B Red 4", "Batting Order Bell A1" ~ "Batting Order Bell A4" and "Batting Order Bell B1" ~ "Batting Order Bell B4" Any of batting order 3 to batting order 6 is set as the correct batting order, and batting order 1 and batting order 2 are set as the incorrect batting order.

In addition, each winning area of the batting order bell is stopped in a mode (correct batting order and predetermined timing) in which a 15-card combination is won in the RBB internal medium state when winning in the normal medium state is performed. Also, the 1-card role wins (the 15-card role does not win). In addition, each winning area of the batting order bell is in the case of winning in the general medium state and the first stop operation is in accordance with the correct batting order in the RBB internal medium state (the first stop operation is not correct). ), the one-card role always wins (there is no loss).

In the winning areas ``batting order chance role 1'' to ``batting order chance role 10'', if a player wins in the middle state of the RBB, if the stop operation is performed in batting order 1 or batting order 2, a 14-card role will be won. . In addition, the winning areas "batting order chance combination 1" to "batting order chance combination 10" are selected according to the timing of the stop operation when a stop operation is performed in any of the batting order 3 to batting order 6 when winning in the RBB internal state. , a 15-card role is won with a predetermined probability (probability of 1/10), and a 1-card role is won with a predetermined probability (probability of 9/10). It should be noted that the winning areas "batting order chance combination 1" to "batting order chance combination 10" are different in the timing of the stop operation for winning the 15-card combination.

In addition, in the winning areas "batting order chance role 1" to "batting order chance role 10", when winning in the normal medium state, the stop operation can be performed in the batting order (batting order 1 and batting order 2) in which the 14-card role in the RBB internal medium state wins. Even in the case of being awarded, the one-card combination (always) wins.

The contents of the parentheses in FIG. 34 indicate the stop operation in the hitting order (and the predetermined state in which the symbols within the predetermined range including the seven blue symbols or the seven red symbols are positioned at predetermined display positions). 10 shows the winning rates of the 1-card and 15-card hands when is played. For example, the notation "1 card (1/4)" is based on the assumption that the timing of the stop operation is random (within the predetermined range). This indicates that the probability of 4 is to miss the 1-card hand (the 1-card hand is not won).

The winning judgment means 44 is activated when the reels 20a to 20c stop rotating, and judges whether or not a winning combination has been won based on how the reels 20a to 20c are stopped. Specifically, the symbol combination displayed (stopped display) on the active line by stopping the reels 20a to 20c is collated with the prize determination table stored in the ROM of the storage means 60. FIG. The winning determination table stores the winning form of each winning combination (symbol combination that wins when stopped), and through the collation described above, the presence or absence of a winning combination and the type of winning combination that has won can be determined. do. When a winning combination wins, the main control board 31 executes a winning process corresponding to the winning combination. Specifically, as the winning process, payout processing is performed when a small win is won, replay processing (replay processing) is performed when a replay win is performed, and the game state is changed when a bonus win is won. A process for transition (game state transition control process) is performed.

Here, the payout process is a process of paying out the number of medals determined based on the payout determined for each combination when a minor winning combination is won, and is performed by the payout control means 45 . The payout control means 45 determines the payout number of medals based on the payout determined for each win when a small winning combination is won, and causes the determined payout number of medals to be paid out to the hopper device. When credits are permitted, the number of credits (the number of credited medals) stored in the credit storage area provided in the RAM of the storage means 60 is used instead of actually paying out medals by the hopper device. ), credit addition processing is performed to add the number of payouts, and medals are virtually paid out.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, 15 medals are paid out when a small winning combination 1 to 17 are won, and 14 medals are paid out when a small winning combination 18 is won. Three medals are paid out when winning a prize, and one medal is paid out when winning a small winning combination of 21 to 45.

Further, the replay process is a process of setting the same game start standby state as the previous game without requiring insertion of medals owned by the player for the next game when the replay wins. does. If the replay wins, the same number of medals as the number set in the input state in the previous game (the game in which the replay won) will be replaced with the medals in the player's hand (including credited medals). An automatic insertion process for automatically inserting medals without using them is performed, and the next game start operation for the start lever 24 is awaited in a state in which an effective line corresponding to the number of medals inserted by the automatic insertion process is set. Also, when the automatic insertion process is performed, additional medals cannot be inserted.

The game state control means 49, as shown in FIG. 35, performs a game state transition control process for transitioning the game state among the normal state, RBB internal state (bonus established state) and RBB operating state (bonus state). conduct. As for the game state transition condition, one condition may be defined, or a plurality of conditions may be defined. When a plurality of conditions are defined, the game state may be shifted based on the establishment of one condition among the plurality of predetermined conditions, or a plurality of the predetermined conditions or The game state may be shifted based on the establishment of all.

Further, as described above, the internal lottery means 42 selects an internal lottery table according to the game state and performs an internal lottery. Specifically, in the general intermediate state, an internal lottery is performed with reference to an internal lottery table in which a big bonus is set as a lottery target. Further, in the RBB internal medium state, an internal lottery is performed with reference to an internal lottery table in which the big bonus is excluded from lottery targets. Further, in the RBB operating state, an internal lottery is performed with reference to an internal lottery table in which the big bonus is excluded from lottery targets.

In the initial state, the game state is in a normal middle state. In the general middle state, refer to the internal lottery table in which all the winning areas except for the winning areas "non-winning", "minor win ALL", "3 cards ALL" and "1 cards ALL" are set for the lottery. An internal lottery will be held. Further, it is possible to shift from the general medium state to the RBB internal medium state. The game state control means 49 shifts the game state to the RBB internal medium state when the big bonus is won in the general medium state.

The RBB internal middle state is a game state that shifts to when a big bonus is won in an internal lottery. In the RBB internal medium state, an internal lottery table in which all the winning areas except for the winning areas "non-winning", "minor win ALL", "3 cards ALL", "1 cards ALL" and "RBB" are set for the lottery. An internal lottery will be held with reference to Further, in the RBB internal middle state, the lottery flag corresponding to the big bonus is maintained in the winning state until the big bonus is won, and when the symbol combination indicating the winning form of the big bonus is displayed on the effective line, the game state is controlled. The means 49 shifts the game state from the RBB internal state to the RBB active state.

The RBB in-operation state is a game state that shifts when a symbol combination indicating a winning form of a big bonus is displayed on an activated line. In the RBB operating state, an internal lottery is performed with reference to an internal lottery table in which the lottery areas "non-win", "minor win ALL", "three cards ALL" and "one card ALL" are set as lottery targets. In addition, in the RBB operating state, it is determined whether or not the end condition is satisfied based on the total number of medals paid out in the RBB operating state, and the number of medals exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 83) is determined. When the coin is paid out, the game state control means 49 terminates the RBB operating state and shifts the game state to the normal state.
In this embodiment, the termination condition of the RBB operating state is determined by the total number of medals paid out. may Also, the RBB in-operation state may be one in which the termination condition is set so that the game is terminated in one game.

The instruction function control means 51 includes a game section control means 80 , an effect state control means 81 , and a privilege imparting means 82 . The instruction function control means 51 performs processing related to the operation of the instruction function for assisting the winning of the specific combination in the advantageous section. Specifically, when a predetermined winning combination is won, the instruction function control means 51 determines whether or not to perform an instruction effect for assisting the winning of this winning combination. More specifically, when the batting order bell is won, the instruction function control means 51 determines whether or not to perform an instruction effect (batting order navigation effect) for announcing the correct batting order and assisting the winning of the 15-card hand. . Based on this determination, the effect control means 100 causes the liquid crystal display 13 to execute the batting order navigation effect.

As shown in FIG. 36, the game zone control means 80 performs a game zone shift control process for shifting the game zone between a non-advantageous zone and an advantageous zone according to the progress of the game. The non-advantageous section is a game section corresponding to the initial state among the plurality of types of game sections. In the non-advantageous section, the privilege providing means 82 performs an advantageous section transition lottery, and when the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the game section control means 80 shifts the game section to the advantageous section. Also, the advantageous section is a game section in which an upper limit (here, 1500 times) is set for the number of times the game can be played. Further, when the game section is set as the non-advantageous section, the instruction performance cannot be performed, and only when the game section is set as the advantageous section, the instruction performance can be performed. The game zone control means 80 ends the advantageous zone when the number of times the game is played in the advantageous zone reaches 1500, which is the upper limit, and shifts the game zone to the non-advantageous zone.

In the non-advantageous section, the privilege granting means 82 performs a lottery (advantageous section transition lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a transition to the advantageous section at a predetermined opportunity. Specifically, the privilege granting means 82 selects a predetermined combination (for example, winning area "watermelon", "chance A", "chance B", "weak cherry", "strong cherry", etc.). A winning area is called a rare combination), a lottery (advantageous section transition lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous section. Then, when winning the advantageous zone shift lottery, the game zone control means 80 shifts the game zone from the non-advantageous zone to the advantageous zone.

In addition, the game interval control means 80 stores the advantageous interval game number counter 65 provided in the RAM of the storage means 60, triggered by the game start operation on the start lever 24, each time a game is played in the advantageous interval. Increment processing is performed to add "1" to the value as a value corresponding to one game. The game section control means 80 does not add to the advantageous section game number counter 65 in the non-advantageous section. Further, at the time when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section, the value stored in the advantageous section game number counter 65 is "0". Then, when the value stored in the advantageous interval game number counter 65 reaches the threshold value (upper limit value) “1500”, the game interval control means 80 deems that the condition for ending the advantageous interval is satisfied, and removes the game interval from the advantageous interval. Move to an advantageous section. In other words, the upper limit of the number of games played in the advantageous interval is set to 1500, so that the number of games exceeding 1500 is not played continuously in the advantageous interval.

In addition, the game interval control means 80 updates the stored value of the difference number counter 64 provided in the RAM of the storage means 60 with the difference number of medals in the advantageous interval, and sets a value corresponding to the number of payout medals (for example, 15). ``15'' when there is a payout of medals, and ``0'' when there is no payout without winning any combination). A value (for example, "3" when three cards are inserted) is subtracted to obtain the calculation result of the difference number in the game, and this calculation result is added to the stored value of the difference number counter 64. Perform update processing. Incidentally, the game section control means 80 does not perform addition to the difference number counter 64 in the non-advantageous section. Further, at the point of time when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section, the stored value of the difference number counter 64 is "0". Then, when the stored value of the difference number counter 64 exceeds a threshold value (for example, "2400"), the game interval control means 80 determines that the condition for ending the advantageous interval is satisfied, and shifts the game interval from the advantageous interval to the non-advantageous interval. Move to section. The stored value of the difference number counter 64 is controlled so as not to fall below the initial value "0". If no combination is won and no medals are paid out, the calculation result of the difference number in the game becomes "-3", and the calculation result of the difference number is added to the stored value of the difference number counter 64 to the initial value. Although it falls below "0", the stored value of the difference number counter after updating is set so that counting is stopped with the initial value "0" as the lower limit. In other words, an upper limit is set for the number of medals that can be obtained in the advantageous section, and the maximum number of medals in the advantageous section is set to "0", and the number of medals increased from the reference exceeds 2400. The advantageous section ends when In addition, if there is a winning replay in a game, it will be treated as if there was a payout of medals equivalent to the prescribed number of inputs in the game in which the replay was won, and the difference number will be calculated, and the replay winning will be free of charge. For the next game to be provided, even if actual medals are not inserted, it may be treated as if medals corresponding to the specified number of inserted medals for the game have been inserted, and the difference may be obtained.

In addition, the advantageous section indicator 18 is turned off during non-advantageous sections and lit during advantageous sections.
It should be noted that the advantageous section indicator 18 does not have to be lit at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section, but may be made to be lit before the first instruction effect is performed. In addition, once the light is turned on, it will not be turned off until the end of the advantageous section.

The production state control means 81, as shown in FIG. 36, provides a production state for shifting the production state among a plurality of types of production states including a non-advantageous section production state, a non-AT production state, and an AT production state (instruction production state). Perform state transition control processing. In addition, the AT production state includes an AT preparation production state, a normal AT production state and a special AT production state. One condition may be defined as the transition condition of the effect state, or a plurality of conditions may be defined. When a plurality of conditions are defined, the production state may be shifted when one condition out of the plurality of predetermined conditions is established, and some or all of the plurality of predetermined conditions may be satisfied. The production state may be shifted based on the establishment.

The non-advantageous section rendering state is a rendering state corresponding to the initial state among a plurality of types of rendering states. In the non-advantageous section, the effect state control means 81 sets the effect state to the non-advantageous section effect state. In the non-advantageous section production state (non-advantageous section), the privilege granting means 82 performs the advantageous section transition lottery as described above. A means 81 shifts the production state to a non-AT production state.

The non-AT production state is a production state that basically shifts when the advantageous section starts, and at the start of the advantageous section, the probability of shifting to the non-AT production state is higher than the probability of shifting to another production state. is also set high. Also, in the non-AT effect state, the batting order navigation effect is executed less frequently than in the AT effect state, and the batting order navigation effect is almost not performed or not performed at all.

In addition, in the non-AT effect state, the privilege providing means 82 performs a lottery (AT lottery) to determine whether or not to move to the AT effect state. Specifically, for example, the privilege granting means 82 performs an AT lottery when winning a rare combination in the non-AT effect state (in a predetermined period in the non-AT effect state). Then, when the shift to the AT performance state is determined based on the AT lottery, the performance state control means 81 shifts the performance state to the AT performance state. Specifically, the production state control means 81 shifts the production state to the AT preparation production state.

Further, an upper limit is set for the number of games played in the non-AT effect state, and when a predetermined number of games (for example, 999 times) are executed in the non-AT effect state, the effect state control means 81 changes the effect state. It is shifted to the AT production state (AT preparation production state). That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a so-called ceiling is set for the number of games played before shifting to the AT effect state. The number of games played in the non-AT effect state may be managed by providing a counter for counting the number of times in the RAM of the storage means 60, for example.

In the AT effect state, when the batting order bell is won, the instruction function control means 51 determines the execution of the batting order navigation effect for notifying the correct batting order. When execution of the batting order navigation effect is determined, the effect control means 100 causes the liquid crystal display 13 to display the correct batting order. In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the batting order bell is won, the batting order navigation effect is executed in any of the AT preparation effect state, the normal AT effect state, and the special AT effect state. However, the frequency of occurrence of the batting order navigation effect in the AT preparation effect state or the special AT effect state may be lower than that in the normal AT effect state. Here, the low frequency includes the case where the batting order navigation effect is not performed at all.

The continuation of the AT effect state is controlled by the AT end determination counter 67 provided in the RAM of the storage means 60.
are managed based on the stored values of The instruction function control means 51 determines a value to be set in the AT end determination counter 67 in the special AT effect state that shifts through the AT preparation effect state. In other words, the instruction function control means 51 increases the stored value of the AT end determination counter 67 in the special AT effect state. In other words, the AT preparation effect state and the special AT effect state are effect states that determine the initial value of the value (stored value of the AT end determination counter 67) relating to the continuation of the AT effect state. The effect state control means 81 shifts the effect state to the special AT effect state when a predetermined number of games are executed in the AT preparation effect state. Further, when the game is executed a predetermined number of times in the special AT effect state, the effect state is shifted to the normal AT effect state.

In addition, the production state control means 81 sets a value corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out in the normal AT production state (for example, if 15 medals are paid out, the value is set to "15", and no combination is won). If there is no payout during the game, the value corresponding to the number of inserted medals used in the game is subtracted (for example, if 3 medals are inserted, the value is set to "0"). Then, update processing of subtracting this calculation result from the stored value of the AT end determination counter 67 is performed. Then, when the stored value of the AT end determination counter 67 reaches the threshold value "0" in the normal AT effect state, the effect state control means 81 satisfies the end condition (one of the end conditions) of the AT effect state. Assuming that, the production state is shifted from the normal AT production state to the non-advantageous section production state. Also, at this time, the game zone control means 80 shifts the game zone from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the number of medals acquired in the AT production state (normal AT production state) reaches a predetermined number (the number set in the special AT production state), the AT production state is supposed to end.

When the stored value of the AT end determination counter 67 reaches the threshold value "0" in the normal AT effect state, if the user has the right to shift to the special AT effect state, the effect state control means 81 shifts the production state to the special AT production state. Then, the instruction function control means 51 increases the stored value of the AT end determination counter 67 in the special AT effect state. In addition, in the special AT effect state, the degree of expectation for an increase in the stored value of the AT end determination counter 67 is higher than in the normal AT effect state, and is a so-called additional special zone. In the special AT effect state, the privilege providing means 82 performs a lottery (additional lottery) for determining whether or not to increase the stored value of the AT end determination counter 67 (whether or not to perform an addition). Then, when winning the extra lottery, the privilege granting means 82 increases the stored value of the AT end determination counter 67.例文帳に追加

The number of medals obtained in the AT effect state may be counted, for example, as follows. That is, when the AT effect state is started, the stored value of the AT end determination counter 67 is set to "0". A process of subtracting from the stored value of the end determination counter 67 is performed, and a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of paid-out medals to the stored value of the AT end determination counter 67 when a small win is won and medals are paid out. You can do it. Then, the AT effect state may be ended based on the fact that the stored value of the AT end determination counter 67 reaches a threshold value (for example, "1000": a value corresponding to the difference number of 1000 sheets). Further, in this example, when an addition is made by winning an addition lottery, a process of subtracting a value corresponding to the addition number from the value of the AT end determination counter 67 may be performed. may be added to the threshold value to reset (update) the threshold value serving as the termination condition of the AT effect state.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the continuation of the AT effect state is managed based on the number of medals obtained in the AT effect state. However, for example, it may be managed based on the number of games played in the AT effect state, the number of batting order navigation effects, or the like. That is, the stored value of the AT end determination counter 67 represents the number of games executable in the AT effect state (AT game count), the number of batting order navigation effects executable in the AT effect state (batting order navigation count), and the like. may be In other words, the value added by the addition lottery or the like may indicate the AT game count or the batting order navigation count. In the special AT effect state, the AT end determination counter 67 is set with the number of AT games, the number of times of batting order navigation, etc., and in the normal AT effect state, AT end determination is performed each time a game is played or the batting order navigation effect is performed. The stored value of the counter 67 may be updated, and the AT effect state may be terminated based on the fact that the stored value of the AT end determination counter 67 reaches the threshold value.

It should be noted that the non-advantageous section effect state may be directly shifted to the AT effect state. For example, in the advantageous section transition lottery, instead of simply determining whether or not to transition to the advantageous section (non-AT production state), whether to shift the production state to the AT production state or to the non-AT production state, or A lottery may be made as to whether or not to shift to the non-advantageous section production state. In other words, the AT lottery may be performed in the non-advantageous section effect state.

Also, the AT effect state may be set according to the game state to be shifted based on the winning of a bonus or winning a prize. For example, when the game state is the RBB inside state, it is possible to shift to the AT effect state, and in the general state or the RBB operating state, it may be impossible to shift to the AT effect state. In other words, in the normal state or the RBB operating state, for example, even if the player wins the AT lottery, the state may not be shifted to the AT effect state, or the AT lottery may not be performed.

In addition, when a bonus is won while the effect state is the AT effect state and the game state is the RBB internal state, after the RBB operating state that shifts due to the bonus prize is completed, the general state is resumed. The AT effect state may be interrupted until the state is shifted to the RBB internal medium state. That is, the batting order navigation effect may be stopped when the bonus is won, and the batting order navigation effect may be restarted when the RBB internal state is entered again.

The instruction function control means 51 initializes the information stored in the RAM of the storage means 60 as the information relating to the instruction function when the advantageous section ends and the game section shifts to the non-advantageous section. conversion processing. Specifically, the instruction function control means 51 controls the stored value of the advantageous section game number counter 65, the stored value of the difference number counter 64, the flag (lottery result) related to the lottery related to the instruction function, and the stored value of the AT end determination counter 67. etc. is initialized. That is, the information related to the instruction function is not carried over over a plurality of advantageous sections. Further, when the initialization means 48 performs the above-described initialization processing that is performed when the setting value is changed, the information related to the instruction effect shown here is also initialized.

When the performance state is the AT performance state, when the batting order bell is won, the liquid crystal display 13 and the speaker provide an instruction performance (batting order navigation performance) to notify the correct batting order and assist the winning of the 15-card hand. 14 or the like is controlled to be executed. When the batting order bell is won and the stop buttons 26a to 26c are pressed in accordance with the correct batting order notified by the instruction performance, 15 prizes are awarded and 15 medals can be obtained without fail. .
Incidentally, when the instruction effect is performed, information indicating the correct hitting order is also displayed on the 7-segment display of the game information display section 17 .

The error detection means 110 monitors the signal states of the door open/close switch 130, the door sensor 132, the insertion detection sensor 134, the first medal passage sensor 136, the second medal passage sensor 138, the shoot sensor 140, the overflow sensor 142, and the payout sensor 144. Then, an error is detected by determining whether the error detection condition is satisfied and identifying the error that has occurred based on the fact that the error detection condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, the error detecting means 110 continues to detect each error even after detecting any error (waiting for an error cancellation operation).

Each error will be described below with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG.
FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining the flow path of medals inserted from the medal slot.

First, in a state where insertion of medals is accepted, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 22 pass through the medal selector 120, are identified and counted, and then pass through the medal chute 122 to the hopper. It is intended to be sent to unit 150 . Here, the medal selector 120 includes an insertion detection sensor 134 , a first medal passage sensor 136 and a second medal passage sensor 138 . Also, the medal shoot 122 has a shoot sensor 140 . The medals inserted from the medal slot 22 are detected by the insertion detection sensor 134, the first medal passage sensor 136, the second medal passage sensor 138, and the shoot sensor 140 in this order.

On the other hand, a state in which a game is being played (from the time the start lever 53 is operated and the reels 20a to 20c start to rotate until the process of paying out medals according to the result of the game is completed), or the medal , the medal blocker 124 is activated to block the flow path from the medal selector 120 to the medal chute 122, and the medals are ejected from the medal selector 120 to the medal payout port 27. is to be returned.

Also, when the medals stored in the hopper unit 150 exceed a predetermined amount, the medals sent to the hopper unit 150 in excess of the predetermined amount are sent to the cash box 126 . In addition, an overflow sensor 142 is provided in a portion of the housing 11 where the cash box 126 is arranged. It is adapted to be detected by the sensor 142 .

Based on the signal states of various sensors, the error detection means 110 detects a backflow error, an empty error, a clogged dispensing error, an abnormal dispensing error, an over error, a retention error, a backup error, a door opening error, an abnormal loading error, a shoot error, and a Detect input detection error.

(1) Backflow Error A backflow error is an error caused by medals flowing backward in the channel. Specifically, it is detected when the signal states (on/off states) of the first medal passing sensor 136 or the second medal passing sensor 138 do not change in the correct order while the medals are being inserted. is an error. The error detection means 110 checks the states of the two sensors each time there is a change in the signal state of the first token passing sensor 136 or the second token passing sensor 138, and if the signal does not change in the correct order, a backflow error is detected. A backflow error detection flag is set in the storage means 60 assuming that it has occurred.

(2) Empty error An empty error is an error caused by running out of medals stored in the hopper unit 150 . Specifically, in a situation where medals are being paid out, it is detected when the signal state of the payout sensor 144 continues for a certain period of time (approximately 2100 ms) in the OFF state (state in which the paid out medals are not detected). error. When the signal instructing the hopper unit 150 to pay out medals is turned on, the error detection means 110 counts time with an empty error detection timer provided in the storage means 60, and counts the time information of the empty error detection timer. When it is determined that the signal state of the payout sensor 144 has remained off for a certain period of time or longer, it is assumed that an empty error has occurred and an empty error detection flag is set in the storage means 60 .

(3) Payout Jam Error The payout jam error is an error caused by the medals to be paid out from the hopper unit 150 being jammed and not discharged. Specifically, in a situation where medals are being paid out, it is detected when the signal state of the payout sensor 144 continues for a certain period of time (approximately 172 ms) or more in the ON state (state in which the medals to be paid out are detected). error. When the signal for instructing the payout of medals to the hopper unit 150 is turned on, the error detection means 110 counts the time with the payout jam error detection timer provided in the storage means 60, and the payout jam error detection timer is turned on. When the signal state of the payout sensor 144 remains on for a certain period of time or more according to the time information, it is assumed that a payout jam error has occurred, and a payout jam error detection flag is set in the storage means 60 .

(4) Abnormal payout error The abnormal payout error is an error caused by payout of medals in a situation in which medals should not be paid out. Specifically, it is an error detected when the signal state of the payout sensor 144 continues for a certain period of time (approximately 6 ms) or more in a situation where medals are not paid out. The error detection means 110 measures time with a payout abnormality error detection timer provided in the storage means 60 in a situation where the signal instructing the payout of medals to the hopper unit 150 is in an OFF state, and the timing information of the payout abnormality error detection timer is If the signal state of the payout sensor 144 remains on for a certain period of time or longer, it is assumed that an abnormal payout error has occurred, and a payout error detection flag is set in the storage means 60 .

(5) Over Error An over error is an error caused by excess tokens stored in the cash box 126 exceeding a predetermined amount. Specifically, it is an error detected when the signal state of the overflow sensor 142 is ON (the signal state indicating that the surplus medals have exceeded a predetermined amount) and continues for a certain period of time (approximately 100 ms) or longer. The error detection means 110 measures time with an over-error detection timer provided in the storage means 60 in a situation where the signal state of the overflow sensor 142 is in the ON state, and detects the signal state of the overflow sensor 142 based on the timing information of the over-error detection timer. is kept on for a certain period of time or longer, it is assumed that an over error has occurred, and an over error detection flag is set in the storage means 60 .

(6) Retention Error A retention error is an error caused by the medal selector 120 being jammed with medals. Specifically, when the signal state of the first medal passage sensor 136 or the second medal passage sensor 138 continues for a certain period of time (approximately 113 ms) or more in the ON state (signal state indicating that the presence of medals is detected). is an error detected by The error detecting means 110 counts time with a retention error detection timer provided in the storage means 60 in a situation where the signal state of at least one of the first medal passing sensor 136 and the second medal passing sensor 138 is ON. If the signal state of the first medal passage sensor 136 or the second medal passage sensor 138 remains on for a certain period of time or more according to the time information of the retention error detection timer, it is assumed that a retention error has occurred, and the storage means 60 Set the stuck error detection flag to .

(7) Backup Error A backup error is an error caused by a failure in RWM backup. Specifically, this error is detected when an RWM backup abnormality is detected when the power is turned on. Alternatively, it is an error detected when the saved value of the stack pointer is not within a specific range when the power is turned on. The error detection means 110 determines that a backup error has occurred and sets a backup error detection flag in the storage means 60 when an RWM backup abnormality is detected or when the stored value of the stack pointer is outside a specific range.

(8) Door open error A door open error is an error caused by opening the lower door 12b (front door 12). Specifically, when the signal state of the door open/close switch 130 that operates when the lower door 12b opens continues for a certain period of time (approximately 48 ms) or longer (signal state indicating that the lower door 12b is open) Error detected. The error detection means 110 measures time with the door opening error detection timer provided in the storage means 60 when the signal state of the door opening/closing switch 130 is in the ON state, and the door opening/closing switch is detected based on the timing information of the door opening error detection timer. When the signal state of 130 remains on for a certain period of time or longer, it is assumed that a door opening error has occurred and a door opening error detection flag is set in the storage means 60 .

(9) Throwing Abnormal Error Throwing abnormal error occurs when the medal blocker 124 is operated to block the flow path to the medal chute 122, and the medal flow path is switched. This is an error caused by passing through a channel different from (here, the channel returned to the medal payout port 27). Specifically, the error is detected when the second medal passage sensor 138 detects the medals flowing toward the medal chute 122 after passing the medal selector 120 after the medal blocker 124 is activated. The error detection means 110 assumes that an abnormal insertion error has occurred and stores the abnormal insertion error in the storage means 60 when the signal state of the second medal passage sensor 138 is ON while the medal blocker 124 is operating. Set detection flags. However, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a non-monitoring period (approximately 250 ms) is provided for determining whether an insertion error has occurred. Time is counted by an insertion abnormality non-monitoring timer provided in , and when the non-monitoring period elapses, the signal state of the second medal passing sensor 138 is checked to determine whether an insertion abnormality error has occurred.

(10) Shoot Error A shoot error is an error caused by a certain difference between the number of medals that have passed through the medal selector 120 and the number of medals that have passed through the medal chute 122 . Specifically, after the inserted medals pass through the first medal passing sensor 136 and the second medal passing sensor 138 in the correct order, the first medal passing sensor 136 and the second medal passing sensor 138 and the second medal passing sensor 138 The difference between the number of medals detected to have passed through the medal passing sensor 138 in the correct order and the number of times the signal state of the shoot sensor 140 has turned on (signal state detecting the presence of medals) is a predetermined number. If it is not within the range, or when a certain period of time has passed since the inserted medal passed through the first medal passing sensor 136 and the second medal passing sensor 138 in the correct order, the first medal passing sensor 136 and the second medal passing sensor 138 The difference between the number of medals detected as having passed through the 2-medal passing sensor 138 in the correct order and the number of times the signal state of the shoot sensor 140 has turned on (signal state detecting the presence of medals) is This error is detected when the number exceeds a predetermined number. The error detection means 110 is provided in the storage means 60 when the signal states of the first medal passing sensor 136 and the second medal passing sensor 138 are in the OFF state and the signal state of the shoot sensor 140 is in the ON state. The number of medals detected as having passed through the first medal passing sensor 136 and the second medal passing sensor 138 in the correct order and the signal state of the shoot sensor 140 are turned on while counting the time with the shot error detection timer. The difference from the number of shots is monitored, and if the difference satisfies the above conditions, it is assumed that a shooting error has occurred and a shooting error detection flag is set in the storage means 60 .

(11) Insertion detection error An insertion detection error is an error caused by medals being jammed near the medal inserting slot 22 . Specifically, it is an error that is detected when the insertion detection sensor 134 in the medal selector 120 is in the ON state (signal state detecting the presence of medals) for a certain period of time (approximately 280 ms) or longer. The error detecting means 110 measures time with the on-detection error detection timer provided in the storage means 60 in a situation where the signal state of the on-detection sensor 134 is in the on state, If the signal state of 134 remains on for a certain period of time or longer, it is assumed that an input detection error has occurred, and the input detection error detection flag is set in the storage means 60 .

Each error is assigned an error code from E1 to E9 according to the type of error. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, an error code E1 is assigned to the backflow error, an error code E2 is assigned to the empty error, and an error code E3 is assigned to the dispensing jam error. An error code E4 is assigned to an abnormal dispensing error, an error code E5 is assigned to an over error, an error code E6 is assigned to a retention error, and an error code E7 is assigned to a backup error. Error code E8 is assigned to door open errors, and error code E9 is assigned to abnormal closing errors, chute errors, and closing detection errors.

When an error is detected by the error detection means 110 , the error management means 111 executes a process of informing the detected error via the liquid crystal display 13 and the game information display section 17 . Specifically, the error management means 111 sets an error code corresponding to the type of error detected, and displays the set error code on the liquid crystal display 13 or the game information display section 17 . In other words, the error management means 111 detects the set error detection flags (backflow error detection flag, empty error detection flag, discharge clogging error detection flag, discharge abnormality error detection flag, over error detection flag, retention error detection flag, backup error detection flag, door opening error detection flag, throwing error detection flag, shoot error detection flag, or throwing detection error detection flag) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 13 or the game information display section 17.

Further, the error management means 111 cancels the error based on the fact that a predetermined cancellation operation has been performed. Specifically, the error management unit 111 performs a process of clearing an error detection flag or the like based on the fact that a predetermined cancellation operation has been performed. More specifically, the error management means 111 cancels pressing of the setting change button or counterclockwise rotation (twisting) of the door key while the door key is inserted into the door key cylinder 19. When a signal is input from the setting change button or the door sensor 132 by these canceling operations, it is determined that the canceling operation has been performed, and the error detection flag stored in the storage means 60 and the timing information of the timer are detected. Clear (delete) the information related to the error such as, and cancel the error.
After the error code is displayed on the game information display unit 17, timer wait processing is performed using the error wait timer provided in the storage means 60, and the period during which the timer wait processing is performed (for example, about 100 ms). After the elapse of, the release operation may be accepted.

The effect control means 100 performs display effects using the liquid crystal display 13, sound effects using the speaker 14, and effects using the lighting device 38 based on the effect data stored in the sub-side storage means 92. Performs control related to lighting effects. For example, by changing the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 13 according to the game state or the like, outputting sound from the speaker 14, or turning on/off the lighting device 38, the game is livened up and the game is assisted. I do a performance to do it.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, an effect (operation effect) for prompting a predetermined operation is executed at a predetermined timing. Specifically, the effect control means 100 executes an operation effect for prompting the player to operate a predetermined operation means when informing the player of the acquisition (granting) of a predetermined privilege (hereinafter referred to as a special privilege).

Here, the case where the special privilege is the right to shift to the AT production state (the right to shift to the advantageous production state) will be described as an example, but the special privilege is not limited to this. It may be an extension of the period of the state), a bonus, or the like. In other words, the special privilege may be anything as long as it is advantageous to the player.

Also, here, the operation means for prompting the operation in the operation effect is the effect button (effect operation means) 160, but the operation means is not limited to this. 26 or the like (see FIG. 30). Moreover, the effect operation means 160 may receive an operation that triggers a change in the effect (such as an image displayed on the liquid crystal display 13). Specifically, for example, the effect operation means 160 includes a push button switch that can be pressed, a non-contact switch that detects an operation such as holding the player's hand, and a touch panel that also functions as the liquid crystal display 13 (displayed on the touch panel). button or the like) or a predetermined lever or the like.

The effect control means 100 executes an operation effect to prompt the operation of the effect operation means 160 when notifying whether or not the special privilege (the right to shift to the AT effect state) has been acquired (whether or not it has been acquired). do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39, the effect control means 100 provides an image (operation The means image 200) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 13. FIG. In other words, the effect control means 100 causes the liquid crystal display 13 to display an image (operation means image 200) for prompting the operation of the effect operation means 160 in a predetermined game in which notification relating to provision of a special privilege can be executed.
It should be noted that a background image or the like on which a character or the like is drawn may be displayed on the back side of the operation means image 200 during execution of the operation effect.

When the effect operation means 160 is operated in a state where the operation means image 200 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 13, the effect control means 100 notifies whether or not the special privilege is obtained. Specifically, when the special privilege has been obtained, the effect control means 100 causes the liquid crystal display 13 to display an image notifying the acquisition of the special privilege. That is, the effect control means 100 causes the liquid crystal display 13 to display an image informing that the transition to the AT effect state has been confirmed (transition to the AT effect state is made). On the other hand, when the special privilege has not been obtained, the effect control means 100 causes the liquid crystal display 13 to display an image notifying that the special privilege has not been obtained. That is, the effect control means 100 causes the liquid crystal display 13 to display an image notifying that the shift to the AT effect state is not confirmed (the shift to the AT effect state is not made).

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, when an error is detected and the error is canceled while the operation means image 200 is being displayed (during the execution of the operation effect), and when a power failure occurs and the corresponding error occurs. The display on the liquid crystal display 13 is made different between when the power is restored from the power failure.

First, the case where an error is detected while the operation means image 200 is being displayed will be described.
When an error is detected during display of the operation means image 200 (when an error occurs), the effect control means 100 interrupts the display of the operation means image 200 on the liquid crystal display 13 and displays an error occurrence notification. let it run. Specifically, the effect control means 100 causes the liquid crystal display 13 to display information about the type of error detected, and notifies that an error has occurred. More specifically, the effect control means 100 causes the liquid crystal display 34 to display an error code corresponding to the error detection flag that is the basis of the decision to notify the occurrence of the error. In other words, the effect control means 100 causes the liquid crystal display 13 to display an image corresponding to the content of the error that has occurred.

Further, when the error detected during display of the operation means image 200 is canceled, the effect control means 100 causes the liquid crystal display 34 to display the operation means image 200 again. That is, when an error is detected during execution of the operation effect and the error is canceled, the effect control means 100 executes the operation effect again. In other words, when an error is detected during execution of the operation effect and the error is canceled, the effect control means 100 continues the operation effect. That is, when an error is detected during execution of the operation effect and the error is canceled, it is possible to proceed with the effect based on the player's operation on the effect operation means 160 . In other words, when an error is detected in a state in which the operation for the effect operation means 160 is valid and the error is canceled, the operation for the effect operation means 160 is returned to a valid state. Then, when the player operates the effect operation means 160, it is notified whether or not the special privilege is obtained.

Next, a case where power failure occurs while the operation means image 200 is being displayed will be described.
When a power failure occurs (power supply is interrupted) while the operation means image 200 is being displayed, the liquid crystal display 13 stops displaying the image. That is, the liquid crystal display 13 is in a state of not displaying anything (black screen display).

Further, when recovery from a power failure occurred during display of the operation means image 200 (when power supply is resumed), the effect control means 100 causes the liquid crystal display 13 to display an image for effect. Moreover, at this time, the effect control means 100 does not display the operation means image 200 . In other words, when power failure occurs during execution of the operation performance and the power is restored from the power failure, the performance control means 100 does not execute the operation performance. In other words, when power interruption occurs during execution of the operation presentation (power interruption occurs and recovers from the power interruption), the operation presentation ends without waiting for the operation of the presentation operating means 160 .

The image displayed on the liquid crystal display 13 when the power is restored from the power failure (the image 202 after power failure recovery) may be, for example, an image for notifying whether or not a special privilege has been obtained. In addition, the post-power-off recovery image 202 may be an image (an image indicating that the user is staying in the state) corresponding to a state (a production state or a game state) to which a special privilege is given (for example). good. Further, the post-power-off recovery image 202 may be an image that is displayed when the effect operation means 160 is operated during execution of the operation effect. In addition, regardless of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 13 before the display of the operation means image 200 before the power failure occurs, after the power failure is restored, basically in the staying state (performance state or game state) The displayed image may be displayed. In other words, the image (default image) with the highest display ratio (probability) may be displayed while the user is staying.

According to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect control means 100 detects an error while the liquid crystal display 13 is performing a predetermined display (display including the operation means image 200), and when the error is canceled. In addition, it is possible to cause the liquid crystal display 13 to display a predetermined display (display including the operation means image 200), and power failure occurs while the liquid crystal display 13 is performing a predetermined display (display including the operation means image 200). occurs, and when the power is restored from the power interruption, a display different from the predetermined display (display including the operation means image 200) on the liquid crystal display 13 (display not including the operation means image 200: post-power interruption image 202 display). When an error occurs, there is a high possibility that the player will continue playing the game after the error is canceled. Since it is performed again, it is possible to prevent the effect from being skipped due to the occurrence of an error. In addition, power outages generally occur after the players have finished playing, such as after the amusement arcade is closed, and there is a high possibility that the players have changed before the power outages and after the power outages. However, according to such a configuration, when a power failure occurs, it is possible to erase the display before the power failure and execute an appropriate display for a new player's game.

The trigger for generating the operation effect may be, for example, a game start operation on the start lever 24, a third stop operation on the stop button 26, or the like. When an operation effect is executed with a game start operation as a trigger, an error or power failure occurs while the reels 20a to 20c are rotating. 20c is in a rotating state. That is, when an error or power failure occurs in the middle of a game, when the error is canceled or the power failure is recovered, the game can be continued. Therefore, when power is cut off during execution of the operation effect during the game and the power is restored from the power cut, the operation means image 200 is not displayed, but the game can be continued. Further, when the operation effect is executed with the third stop operation as a trigger, even if an error occurs during the execution of the operation effect after the winning process is completed and the error is canceled, the operation means An image 200 is to be displayed.

In addition, when a power failure occurs while an error detected during execution of the operation performance is being notified, the performance control means 100 does not display the operation means image 200 when the power failure is recovered. That is, in this case, the same display as in the case where power failure occurs during execution of the operation effect and recovery from the power failure is performed. In this way, when power failure occurs while an error detected during execution of the operation performance is being notified, when the power is turned on again, the power failure is recovered in a state in which the error is canceled. However, in this way, if power failure occurs while the error detected during execution of the operation effect is being reported, and the power is turned on again, the error that was reported before the power failure will be reported. Alternatively, when the error is cleared, the operation means image 200 may be displayed again.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the game is played using medals as game value, but the game value may be electrical information (so-called medalless). In this case, when the winning combination wins, the amount of value corresponding to the winning combination may be given to the player as electrical information.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, the game control form and configuration of the slot machine are not limited to those of the above-described embodiments. Further, the control operation described above can be applied not only to the slot machine but also to other game machines such as a pachinko game machine and a medalless game machine. INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention can be applied to gaming machines, including slot machines, pachinko gaming machines, medalless gaming machines, and the like.

In addition, within the scope of the present invention, it is possible to freely combine each embodiment, modify arbitrary constituent elements of each embodiment, or omit arbitrary constituent elements in each embodiment. .

13 liquid crystal display (display means)
20a, 20b, 20c, 110a, 110b, 110c reels 26a, 26b, 26c, 120a, 120b, 120c stop button 40 input acceptance means 42 internal lottery means 43 reel control means 44 prize determination means 47 setting change means 49 game state control means 51 Instruction function control means 100 Effect control means 200 Operation means image 202 Image after power failure recovery

Claims (1)

a plurality of reels;
stop buttons provided corresponding to the plurality of reels;
an internal lottery means for performing an internal lottery to determine the suitability of a role;
Winning judgment means for judging the winning of a winning combination based on the stop mode of the plurality of reels;
Reel control means for rotating the plurality of reels for each game, and using the operation of the stop button as a trigger to stop the reels in a stop mode according to the result of an internal lottery;
an instruction function control means for controlling the execution of an instruction performance for assisting the winning of a predetermined combination;
A gaming machine comprising an effect control means for controlling display of an image on the display means,
In a predetermined game, it is possible to play the game by inserting either the first specified number or the second specified number of game values,
A game performed by inserting the second specified number of game values has lower performance related to the instruction effect than a game performed by inserting the first specified number of game values,
The production control means is
When an error is detected while the display means is displaying a predetermined display and the error is canceled, the display means can be caused to display the predetermined display,
When a power failure occurs while the display means is displaying the predetermined display, and the power failure is restored, the display means can display a display different from the predetermined display,
causing the display means to display a special image notifying that the game is being played with the second specified number when the game with the second specified number is started;
When a replay is won in the second specified number of games, a predetermined period of time relating to the conditions for starting the demonstration effect elapses without a predetermined operation being input to the gaming machine after the last operation of pressing the stop button. a state in which the special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing before the
When a small winning combination is won in the second specified number of games, a predetermined period of time relating to the conditions for starting the demonstration effect is made without inputting a predetermined operation to the gaming machine after the last operation of pressing the stop button. A game machine characterized in that the special image is set to a state in which the special image is not displayed at a predetermined timing prior to the passage of time.

Images